Intermec 5250 Programmer's Reference Manual

PDF

Document

Publicitate

5250 Terminal Emulation

PROGRAMMER’S

REFERENCE GUIDE

" " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " "

P/N 977-047-039

Revision C

July 1998

NOTICE

This publication contains information proprietary to Intermec Technologies Corporation. It is being supplied to you with the express understanding that the information contained herein is for the benefit of the contracting party only, and may not be copied, distributed, or displayed to third parties without the express written consent of Intermec Technologies Corporation, and shall be returned to

Intermec Technologies Corporation upon written request. If a purchase, license, or nondisclosure agreement has been executed, the terms of that agreement shall govern this document.

This publication is furnished for information only, and the information in it is subject to change without notice. Although every effort has been made to provide complete and accurate information, Intermec Technologies Corporation assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document.

Disclaimer of Warranties. The sample source code included in this document is presented for reference only. The code does not necessarily represent complete, tested programs. The code is provided “AS IS WITH ALL FAULTS.” ALL

WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED, INCLUDING THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

We welcome your comments concerning this publication. Although every effort has been made to keep it free of errors, some may occur. When reporting a specific problem, please describe it briefly and include the book title and part number, as well as the paragraph or figure number and the page number.

Send your comments to:

Intermec Technologies Corporation

Publications Department

550 Second Street SE

Cedar Rapids, IA 52401

INTERMEC, NORAND, and PEN*KEY are registered trademarks of Intermec

Technologies Corporation.

This publication is printed on recycled paper.

Acknowledgements

AS/400, OS/400, System/36, and System/38 are trademarks, and IBM is a registered trademark, of International Business Machines Corporation.

Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.

Some material in this programmer’s reference guide reproduced courtesy of IBM.

European Notice

The 902--928 MHz SST (Spread Spectrum Transmission) radio referred to in this manual is not available for sale or use in Europe (including, but not limited to,

Great Britain, Italy, Germany, France, Spain, Norway, Denmark, Sweden,

Finland, Portugal, and the Benelux countries). Any references in this manual to

902--928 MHz SST, or modules containing 902--928 MHz SST radios, should be disregarded by users of this product in Europe.

" " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " "

SECTION 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Purpose of This Guide

Intended Audience

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

What to Read First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Organization of This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Conventions

If You Need Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Related Publications

Wireless Stations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Controllers and Gateways

Multiple Base Adapter

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Access Points and Base Radios

Other Publications

Radio Network Description

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Host Computer

Controller

Base Radios

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wireless Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Types of Radio Networks

UHF Radio Network

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SST Radio Network With Ethernet Backbone

Open Wireless LAN

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2

RT3210 Radio Terminal

Overview

Screen Size

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Character Sizes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1

2-1

2-2

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide i

1-1

1-5

1-6

1-7

1-8

1-11

1-12

1-13

1-14

1-1

1-2

1-3

1-4

CONTENTS

Screen Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Center Cursor Mode

Corner Mode

Page Mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lazy Mode

Locked Mode

Annunciators

Keyboard

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Shift Keys

Alphabetic Keys

Numeric Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Special Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AID-Generating Keys

Cursor Movement Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Field Exit Key

Signal Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Special Control Keys

Special Host Keys

Other Keys

Scan Ahead

Key Repeat

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Key Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3

RT1100 Radio Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview

Screen Size

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Screen Modes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Center Cursor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Corner Mode

Page Mode

Lazy Mode

Locked Mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Annunciators

Keyboard

Shift Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alphabetic Keys

Numeric Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ii 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

2-8

2-9

2-11

2-13

2-14

2-3

2-4

2-5

2-7

2-14

2-15

2-17

2-18

2-19

2-20

3-1

3-1

3-2

3-3

3-4

3-5

3-7

3-8

CONTENTS

Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Special Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AID-Generating Keys

Cursor Movement Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Field Exit Key

Signal Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Key Ahead

Scan Ahead

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Special Control Keys

Special Host Keys

Other Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-8

3-10

3-12

3-13

3-14

3-16

3-18

SECTION 4

RT1700 Radio Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1

Overview

Screen Size

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Screen Modes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Center Cursor Mode

Corner Mode

Page Mode

Lazy Mode

Locked Mode

Annunciators

Keyboard

Shift Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

57-Key Keyboard

37-Key Keyboard

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alphabetic Keys

Numeric Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Special Function Keys

AID-Generating Keys

Cursor Movement

Field Exit

Signal Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Special Control Keys

Special Host Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-4

4-6

4-9

4-10

4-11

4-1

4-2

4-3

4-4

4-12

4-13

4-14

4-16

4-17

4-19

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide iii

CONTENTS

Other Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Key Ahead

Scan Ahead

Key Repeat

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5

RT5900 Radio Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview

Screen Size

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Screen Modes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Center Cursor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Corner Mode

Page Mode

Lazy Mode

Locked Mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Annunciators

Keyboard

Shift Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alphabetic Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Numeric Keys

Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Special Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AID-Generating Keys

Cursor Movement Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Field Exit Key

Signal Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Special Control Keys

Special Host Keys

Other Keys

Scan Ahead

Key Repeat

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Key Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-20

4-21

4-23

5-1

5-4

5-6

5-8

5-9

5-11

5-1

5-2

5-3

5-4

5-13

5-14

5-15

5-17

5-18

5-19

5-20 iv 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

CONTENTS

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY R 6400 Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview

Screen Size

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Screen Modes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Center Cursor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Corner Mode

Page Mode

Lazy Mode

Locked Mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Annunciators

Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

51-Key Keyboard

41-Key Keyboard

Shift Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alphabetic Keys

Numeric Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

51-Key Keyboard

41-Key Keyboard

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Special Characters

Cursor Movement

Field Exit

Signal Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Special Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AID-Generating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Special Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Special Host Keys

Other Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Key Ahead

Scan Ahead

Key Repeat

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1

6-21

6-22

6-23

6-25

6-12

6-14

6-15

6-17

6-18

6-19

6-4

6-5

6-6

6-9

6-10

6-1

6-2

6-3

6-4

SECTION 7

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer

Overview

Screen Size

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1

7-1

7-2

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide v

CONTENTS

Screen Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Center Cursor Mode

Corner Mode

Page Mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lazy Mode

Locked Mode

Annunciators

Keyboard

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Shift Keys

Alphabetic Keys

Numeric Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Special Function Keys

AID-Generating Keys

Cursor Movement

Field Exit Key

Signal Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Special Control Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Special Host Keys

Other Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Key Ahead

Scan Ahead

Key Repeat

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-7

7-8

7-10

7-12

7-13

7-2

7-3

7-4

7-5

7-14

7-16

7-17

7-18

7-19

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Screen Design Aid

Applications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Data Stream Command Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Input Commands

Read Immediate (Immediate) Command

Read Input Fields Command

Read MDT Fields Command

Read MDT Alternate Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Read Screen (Immediate) Command

Save Screen (Immediate) Command

. . . . . . . . . . . .

Read Modified Immediate Alternate Command . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

vi 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

8-1

8-1

8-2

8-3

8-4

8-6

8-7

8-9

8-11

8-12

CONTENTS

Output Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Clear Format Table Command

Clear Unit Command

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Restore Screen Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Roll Command

Write Error Code Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Write to Display (WTD) Command

Orders

Insert Cursor (IC) Order

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Move Cursor (MC) Order

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Repeat to Address (RA) Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Set Buffer Address (SBA) Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Start of Field (SF) Order

Start of Header (SOH) Order

Transparent Data (TD) Order

Asynchronous 5250 Prefixes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Messages and Parameter Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 9

Extended Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transmit and Receive On RS-232 Port (#F)

Flow Control

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Return AID Key Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Return Codes for Transmit and Receive

Example of Transmit and Receive

Transmit Only On RS-232 Port (#P)

Flow Control

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Return Codes for Transmit Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Example of Transmit Only

Receive Only On RS-232 Port (#G)

Return Codes for Receive Only

Example of Receive Only

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Set Parameters (#H)

Return Codes for Set Parameters

Example of Set Parameters

Return Version (#V)

Tone (#T)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-25

8-26

8-27

8-28

8-38

8-40

8-41

8-14

8-15

8-16

8-18

8-19

8-22

8-24

9-1

9-14

9-16

9-17

9-20

9-21

9-22

9-25

9-26

9-27

9-1

9-2

9-7

9-9

9-10

9-11

9-14

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide vii

CONTENTS

Scan Bar Code Parameters (#S)

Control Character Byte 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Control Character Byte 2

Control Character Byte 3

Bar Code Length

UPC

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EAN Algorithms

Code 39

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Plessey

Codabar

Code 11

Code 93

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Code 128

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Straight or Computer Identics 2of5

Interleaved 2of5

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Terminating Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Return Codes for Scan Bar Code Parameters

Example of Scan Bar Code Parameters

Encoded Code 39

Escape Characters

Concatenation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX A

Bar Code Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to Enable Algorithms

How Scanning Works

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The Encoded Code 39 Exception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How Stream Scan Works

How Scan All Fields Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to Scan Individual Fields

What Scan Ahead Allows

How the Host Gets Bar Codes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX B

Conversion Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Decimal to Hexadecimal

Binary to EBCDIC

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

viii 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

9-36

9-37

9-38

9-39

9-40

9-41

9-29

9-30

9-31

9-32

9-33

9-34

9-35

9-41

9-43

9-48

9-49

9-50

B-1

B-1

B-5

A-1

A-1

A-2

A-3

A-4

A-5

A-6

CONTENTS

APPENDIX C

System/36 Line Generations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Line Generations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX D

System/38 Line Generations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-1

C-1

D-1

D-1

APPENDIX E

AS/400 Line Generations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Multipoint Line Configuration Example

5394 Description Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Device Description Example

Sample Configuration

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Index-1

FIGURES

Figure 1-1 Controller Emulating 5394 Control Units for AS/400 Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-2 Controller Emulating 5294 Control Units for System/36 or System/38 Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-3 Sample UHF Radio Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-4 Sample SST Radio Network With Ethernet

Medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-5 Sample Open Wireless LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-1 RT3210 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-2 RT3210 Windowing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-1 RT1100 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-2 RT1100 Windowing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-9

1-10

1-13

1-14

1-15

2-7

2-13

3-6

3-12

E-1

E-1

E-2

E-6

E-9

E-13

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide ix

CONTENTS

Figure 4-1 RT1700 57-Key Keyboard

Figure 4-2 RT1700 37-Key Keyboard

Figure 4-3 RT1700 Windowing Mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 5-1 RT5900 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 5-2 RT5900 Windowing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6-1 PEN*KEY 6400 51-Key Keyboard

Figure 6-2 PEN*KEY 6400 41-Key Keyboard

Figure 6-3 PEN*KEY 6400 Windowing Mode

. . . . . . . . . .

Figure 7-1 PEN*KEY 6500 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 7-2 PEN*KEY 6500 Windowing Mode . . . . . . . . . .

TABLES

Table 2-1 RT3210 Special Characters

Table 2-3 RT3210 Signal Keys

Table 2-4 RT3210 Special Control Keys

Table 2-5 RT3210 Special Host Keys

Table 2-6 Other RT3210 Keys and Operations

Table 2-7 RT3210 Key Repeat

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-2 RT3210 AID-Generating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-1 RT1100 Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-2 RT1100 AID-Generating Keys

Table 3-3 RT1100 Signal Keys

Table 3-4 RT1100 Special Control Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-5 RT1100 Special Host Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-6 Other RT1100 Keys and Operations . . . . . . . . .

Table 4-1 RT1700 Letters, 37-Key Keyboard

Table 4-2 RT1700 Special Characters

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 4-3 RT1700 AID-Generating Keys

Table 4-4 RT1700 Signal Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 4-5 RT1700 Special Control Keys

Table 4-6 RT1700 Special Host Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 4-7 Other RT1700 Keys and Operations

Table 4-8 RT1700 Key Repeat

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-8

3-11

3-14

3-16

3-17

2-9

2-12

2-15

2-17

2-19

4-10

4-11

4-13

4-17

4-18

4-19

4-20

4-22

6-7

6-8

6-17

7-6

7-12

4-7

4-8

4-15

5-7

5-13 x 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

CONTENTS

Table 5-1 RT5900 Special Characters

Table 5-3 RT5900 Signal Keys

Table 5-4 RT5900 Special Control Keys

Table 5-5 RT5900 Special Host Keys

Table 5-6 Other RT5900 Keys and Operations

Table 5-7 RT5900 Key Repeat

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-2 RT5900 AID-Generating Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-1 PEN*KEY 6400 Letters, 51-Key Keyboard

Table 6-2 PEN*KEY 6400 Letters, 41-Key Keyboard

. . .

Table 6-3 PEN*KEY 6400 Special Characters . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-4 PEN*KEY 6400 Special Characters, Alpha

Lock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-5 PEN*KEY 6400 AID-Generating Keys . . . . . . .

Table 6-6 PEN*KEY 6400 Function Keys, Alpha

Lock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-7 PEN*KEY 6400 Signal Keys

Table 6-9 PEN*KEY 6400 Special Host Keys

Table 6-10 Other PEN*KEY 6400 Keys and Operations

Table 6-11 PEN*KEY 6400 Key Repeat

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-8 PEN*KEY 6400 Special Control Keys . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 7-1 PEN*KEY 6500 Special Characters

Table 7-3 PEN*KEY 6500 Signal Keys

Table 7-5 PEN*KEY 6500 Special Host Keys

Table 7-6 Other PEN*KEY 6500 Keys and Operations

Table 7-7 PEN*KEY 6500 Key Repeat

. . . . . . . . . .

Table 7-2 PEN*KEY 6500 AID-Generating Keys

Table 7-4 PEN*KEY 6500 Special Control Keys

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 8-1 Input Commands and Hex Codes

Table 8-2 Output Commands and Hex Codes

Table 8-3 Write to Display Control Byte 1

Table 8-4 Write to Display Control Byte 2

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 8-5 Write to Display Command Orders

Table 8-7 Field Control Words

Table 8-8 Start of Field Control Word

Table 8-9 Start of Field Attributes

Table 8-10 Function Key Bit Switches

Table 8-11 Resequencing

. . . . . . . . . .

Table 8-6 Field Format Word for Start of Field Order . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-8

7-11

7-14

7-15

7-16

7-18

6-16

6-19

6-20

6-21

6-22

6-24

8-3

8-4

8-23

8-24

8-25

8-30

8-31

8-36

8-39

6-10

6-11

6-12

6-14

6-15

5-9

5-12

5-15

5-16

5-17

5-19

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide xi

CONTENTS

Table 8-12 System Codes and Descriptions

Table 8-13 Parameter Errors

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 9-1 Transmit and Receive Characters

Table 9-2 Return AID Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 9-3 Transmit Only Characters

Table 9-4 Receive Only Characters

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 9-5 Set Parameters Characters

Table 9-6 Return Version Characters

Table 9-7 Tone Options

Table 9-8 Scan Bar Code Parameters

Table 9-9 Control Byte 1 Characters

Table 9-10 Control Byte 2 Characters

Table 9-11 Control Byte 3 Characters

Table 9-12 Bar Code Length

Table 9-13 UPC Bar Code Characters

Table 9-14 EAN Algorithms

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 9-15 Code 39 Algorithms Characters

Table 9-16 Plessey Characters

Table 9-17 Codabar Characters

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 9-18 Plessey Check Digit Characters

Table 9-19 Code 11 Characters

Table 9-20 Code 93 Characters

Table 9-21 Code 128 Characters

Table 9-22 2of5 Characters

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 9-23 Interleaved 2of5 Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 9-24 Key Press Sequences for Encoded Code 39 . . .

Table A-1 Bar Code Data String Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-42

8-44

9-30

9-31

9-32

9-33

9-34

9-35

9-36

9-4

9-7

9-12

9-17

9-22

9-27

9-28

9-29

9-36

9-37

9-38

9-39

9-40

9-44

A-7 xii 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

Section 1 Introduction

" " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " "

Purpose of This Guide

This programmer’s reference guide describes INTERMEC R radio products using Systems Network Architecture and

Synchronous Data Link Control (SNA/SDLC). The radio products emulate IBM products that communicate using the 5250 data stream.

The 5250 data stream governs the data flow between the host computer and wireless terminal emulation stations. It specifies what data can be displayed on the wireless station and how it must be positioned. It also defines the types of data a wireless station can collect for each input field.

The purpose of this guide is to define the differences between IBM’s implementation of the data stream and adaptation of the 5250 data stream for hand-held wireless stations.

This guide contains descriptions of:

How the wireless stations’ keyboards and overlays emulate the IBM 5291 Display Station

5250 display data stream commands and orders supported by the wireless stations

Extended commands for the wireless stations

Line configurations for IBM host computers

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 1-1

SECTION 1

Introduction

Two types of 5250 products are available: those for an IBM midrange host computer (such as System/36, System/38, and AS/400) and those for personal computers serving as host. This programmer’s guide describes products for IBM midrange host computers.

Intended Audience

This guide is prepared assuming you are already familiar with the operation of the 5250 data stream and equipment.

The intended audience is the host computer programmer who needs to design interfaces to wireless stations set up for 5250 terminal emulation.

What to Read First

Before you begin using the wireless station as an emulation product, read the sections about the wireless stations you are designing interfaces to. The information will give you a basic understanding of the equipment you will be working with. You can also skim the appropriate data stream commands for programming guidance on the 5250 commands the wireless stations support.

If your wireless station network has not yet been installed, read first the installation and user guides provided with your hardware. The guide describes how to install the hardware and configure it according to the requirements of your site.

1-2 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 1

Introduction

Organization of This Guide

This guide is divided into sections that specifically address the operation and programming of wireless stations. This

Introduction contains a brief overview of this programmer’s guide. It also describes the components on the radio network.

Sections 2 through 7 describe how the wireless stations’ annunciators and keyboards emulate IBM 5291 Display Station operation. Specific sections are:

Section 2, “RT3210 Radio Terminal”

Section 3, “RT1100 Radio Terminal”

Section 4, “RT1700 Radio Terminal”

Section 5, “RT5900 Radio Terminal”

Section 6, “PEN*KEY R 6400 Computer”

Section 7, “PEN*KEY 6500 Computer”

The remaining sections do the following:

Section 8, “Display Data Stream” describes host data stream commands (SNA and asynchronous) and orders supported by the wireless stations can be found in this section. The section also lists system codes and parameter errors.

Section 9, “Extended Commands” describes the commands you can use to print, scan bar codes, and send communications over the wireless station’s RS-232 port. Extended commands provide additional functions for physical characteristics that extend beyond the normal operation of an IBM 5291 Display Station.

Appendixes contain bar code scanning information, conversion charts, and line configuration guides for

IBM System/36, System/38, and AS/400 host computers.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 1-3

SECTION 1

Introduction

Conventions

To help you quickly locate and interpret information, this publication uses the conventions in the following chart.

Convention

ALL CAPS

[KEY]

Meaning

Wireless station firmware menu options.

On the wireless station, press the key or keys specified in brackets.

If You Need Help

The best way to reach us is by phone. Following are Customer Response Hotline phone numbers.

In the United States, call: 1-800-221-9236

In Canada, call: 1-800-633-6149

Related Publications

The following publications provide information beyond the purpose of this programmer’s guide. Numbers in parentheses are publication part numbers.

Wireless Stations

The user’s guide for each wireless station describes each firmware menu option in detail and how to operate and maintain the computer.

1-4 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 1

Introduction

Specific user guides are:

PEN*KEY Model 6400 (961-047-093)

PEN*KEY Model 6500/6550 (961-047-099)

RT1100 (961-047-069)

RT1700 (961-047-068)

RT3210 (961-047-074)

RT5900 (961-047-121)

Controllers and Gateways

RC4030E Gateway User’s Guide (961-047-087)

The user guide for the RC4030E Gateway describes how to install, configure, and troubleshoot the gateway.

RCB4030 Base and Base/Controller User’s Guide

(961-047-075)

The user’s guide for the RCB4030 base describes how the base operates. The guide also describes how to install the base, interpret its LEDs, set its switches, and troubleshoot.

Multiple Base Adapter

MBA3000 Multiple Base Adapter User’s Guide

(961-047-032)

This guide describes how to operate the MBA3000 Multiple

Base Adapter.

Access Points and Base Radios

6710 Access Point User’s Guide (961-047-081)

The user guide for the 6710 Access Point describes how to install, configure, and troubleshoot the access point.

RB3000 Base Station User’s Guide (962-047-012)

This guide describes how to operate the RB3000 and

RB3001 Base Stations.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 1-5

SECTION 1

Introduction

RCB4030 Base and Base/Controller User’s Guide

(961-047-075)

The user’s guide for the RCB4030 base describes how the base operates. The guide also describes how to install the base, interpret its LEDs, set its switches, and troubleshoot.

Other Publications

Application Developer’s Kit Reference Manual

(961-051-001)

This manual covers the commands that programmers can use to write various applications for RT1100, RT1700, and

RT5900 Radio Terminals.

IBM 5250 Information Display System Functions Reference Manual

This reference manual provides more detailed descriptions of 5250 data stream commands than what is presented in this reference guide. The manual is available through IBM.

IBM 5394 Remote Control Unit Functions Reference

Release 1 and Release 2

This publication provides information about implementing the 5250 data stream for the control unit. This manual is available through IBM.

IBM 5394 Remote Control Unit User’s Guide

This publication provides general information about the control unit. This manual is available through IBM.

Maintaining NiCd Batteries User’s Guide

(961-028-063)

The battery user’s guide describes how to maintain the life of nickel-cadmium batteries.

1-6 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 1

Introduction

Radio Network Description

A radio network using the 5250 data stream corresponds directly to an IBM 5250 hard-wired network. A controller emulates an IBM 5294 or 5394 Control Unit. Wireless stations emulate IBM 5291 Display Stations. The radio link between a base radio and a wireless station replaces the coax link between a control unit and display station. Programs are written for the wireless stations exactly as they would be written for a 5291 Display Station, with the exception of screen size and specific extensions. Nomenclature for commands, orders, and functions are the same where possible.

The following pages briefly describe the components on the radio network. For more information about each component, refer to its user guide.

Host Computer

The radio network operates with an IBM AS/400, System/36, or System/38 host computer as a central distribution point for commands and data storage. Commands originate in the application program on the host computer.

The 5250 host communicates in strings of EBCDIC characters. The sequence of events that make up the communication cycle is the same for any protocol, data stream, or system of transmission:

1. The host computer’s operating system makes a connection with the controller, or vice versa.

2. Each wireless station starts a session with the host computer’s operating system.

3. The wireless station selects the host connection and application.

4. The application communicates with the wireless station.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 1-7

SECTION 1

Introduction

Controller operation in use is transparent to the host.

The host computer’s application program serves as a conduit to the controller. The controller, in turn, serves as a distribution point for the radio network. When a wireless station logs onto the system, the controller activates the host program. Based on data from the host computer, the controller program then controls the screens sent to the wireless station and uses the wireless station’s responses to access or update the host computer’s database.

Controller

The controller is the “gateway” that passes messages between a host computer and the wireless stations. The controller links the host computer to a base radio, which communicates with the portable wireless stations on the wireless network. The wired and wireless network is transparent to the host computer, which sees the wireless network as a set of desktop terminals.

The controller establishes a communication session with each wireless station to exchange digital information.

While the wireless station’s application program handles the individual wireless stations, the controller makes the complement of wireless stations look like a hard-wired network to the host computer operator.

Controllers can emulate four multidrop IBM 5394 or eight

5294 Control Units. The primary consideration governing the configuration is which IBM host is in use:

Emulation of 5394 Control Units works best for IBM

AS/400 host computers.

Emulation of 5294 Control Units works best for IBM

System/36 and System/38 host computers.

1-8 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 1

Introduction

The controller supports 64 logical units (LUs) which correspond with wireless station network addresses 0 to 63.

When emulating four 5394 Control Units, each logical controller handles 16 LUs. A group of 16 LUs is linked to each

SDLC address, numbers 1 through 4. Figure 1-1 shows a logical representation of four 5394 Control Units emulated by the controller.

5394

SDLC address #1

(up to 16 LUs)

Physical Controller

(wireless station addresses 00--15)

5394

SDLC address #2

(up to 16 LUs)

(wireless station addresses 16--31)

5394

SDLC address #3

(up to 16 LUs)

(wireless station addresses 32--47)

5394

SDLC address #4

(up to 16 LUs)

(wireless station addresses 48--63)

Figure 1-1

Controller Emulating 5394 Control Units for AS/400 Host

Figure 1-2 shows a different configuration. The controller emulates eight 5294 Control Units with 8 LUs each. The

LUs are located at SDLC addresses 1 through 8. This provides up to 64 LUs and is suitable for IBM System/36 or

System/38 host computers.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 1-9

SECTION 1

Introduction

Physical Controller

5294

SDLC address #1

(up to 8 LUs)

(wireless station addresses 0--7)

5294

SDLC address #2

(up to 8 LUs)

(wireless station addresses 8--15)

5294

SDLC address #3

(up to 8 LUs)

(wireless station addresses 16--23)

5294

SDLC address #4

(up to 8 LUs)

(wireless station addresses 24--31)

5294

SDLC address #5

(up to 8 LUs)

(wireless station addresses 32--39)

5294

SDLC address #7

(up to 8 LUs)

(wireless station addresses 48--55)

5294

SDLC address #6

(up to 8 LUs)

(wireless station addresses 40--47)

5294

SDLC address #8

(up to 8 LUs)

(wireless station addresses 56--63)

Figure 1-2

Controller Emulating 5294 Control Units for System/36 or System/38 Host

In either emulation, SDLC addresses can range from 1 to

254. Each SDLC address must be unique.

In either emulation, you can eliminate unused PUs by reducing, through the controller’s setup parameters, the number of LUs supported. Refer to the controller’s user guide for more information about setting up the controller.

1-10 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 1

Introduction

Base Radios

Base radios (also called access points) directly connect to the network and pass information from the wireless stations to the controller. Wireless stations passing from the coverage area of one base radio to another are tracked automatically by the network. This is called “roaming.”

Multiple base radios can be hard-wired to an RS-485 or

Ethernet backbone, or linked through a radio connection between base radios. One base radio must be hard-wired to the controller.

The controller communicates with the base radios over a wired network. Messages to the wireless stations from the controller are passed over the wired network to the base radio. The base radio converts the message into the protocol used by the wireless station, and distributes the message onto the network. The wireless station receives the message over the radio link. The process of formatting and handling the messages between base radios and the wireless stations is transparent to the operator.

Base radios operate within the 900 MHz or at 2.4 GHz

(WLIF) frequency range. UHF base radios operate in the

450 to 470 MHz band of radio waves.

Wireless Stations

The wireless stations are the portable components on the network. Their small size allows them to be used in the warehouse or plant to gather information through the keyboard or integrated bar code scanner. The portable wireless stations provide interactive communication between the operator and host computer.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 1-11

SECTION 1

Introduction

Wireless stations provide portable, wireless interactive data communication and support bar code scanning for real-time data collection. They are the network-addressable software entity which interfaces the wireless data network to the base radio.

Each wireless station monitors all messages from the host computer and responds only to those containing its unique address number. This communication process allows commands and data to be received, stored, and processed. Data collected by the wireless station’s keyboard or scanner is returned in a similar fashion. The controller buffers (saves) the data to be forwarded to the host computer.

The information in this programmer’s guide applies to all wireless stations set up for 5250 terminal emulation. Wireless stations have UHF, 900 MHz, or WLIF radios.

Types of Radio Networks

The following pages briefly describe how radio networks emulate an IBM 3270 hard-wired network. Multiple network configurations are possible.

UHF Radio Network

A UHF radio network has the following components:

Host computer

RC3240 or RC3250 Controller

RB3000, RB3001, RB3020, or RB3021 Base with UHF radio

RT3210, RT1100, RT1700, or RT5900 Radio Terminals with UHF radios

1-12 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 1

Introduction

Figure 1-3 shows a sample UHF radio network. Note how the radio link from the base radio to the radio terminals replaces the coax links (dotted lines) between the control unit and Model 2 terminals.

IBM Host

Computer

IBM 3278

Model 2

Terminal

IBM 3278

Model 2

Terminal

RT5900 Radio

Terminal

Front End

Processor

IBM 3274

Control Unit

RT1100 Radio

Terminals

Controller Base Radio

Figure 1-3

Sample UHF Radio Network

SST Radio Network With Ethernet

Backbone

A radio network with an Ethernet backbone has the following components:

Host computer

RCB4030 Base/Controller

RCB4030 Base/Controller with SST 900 MHz radio

RT3210, RT1100, RT1700, or RT5900 Radio Terminals with 900 MHz radios

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 1-13

SECTION 1

Introduction

Figure 1-4 shows a sample radio network. Note how the radio links from the base radios to the radio terminals replace the coax links (dotted lines) between the control unit and Model 2 terminals.

IBM Host

Computer

IBM 3278

Model 2

Terminal

IBM 3278

Model 2

Terminal

Front End

Processor

RT5900 Radio

Terminal

IBM 3274

Control Unit

Base/Controller or Gateway

Base Radio

RT1700 Radio

Terminals

Ethernet Medium

Figure 1-4

Sample SST Radio Network With Ethernet Medium

Open Wireless LAN

Open wireless LAN components connect to an Ethernet medium. Components include the following:

1-14 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 1

Introduction

Host computer

RC4030E Gateway, Wireless Network Access Server, or 6950 Enterprise Gateway Server

6710 Access Point with synthesized UHF, 900 MHz, or

WLIF radio

Wireless stations with synthesized UHF, 900 MHz, or

WLIF radios

Figure 1-5 shows a sample radio network with an RC4030E

Gateway. Note how the radio links from the 6710 Access

Point to the wireless terminal emulation stations replace the coax links (dotted lines) between the control unit and

Model 2 terminals.

IBM Host

Computer

IBM 3278

Model 2

Terminal

IBM 3278

Model 2

Terminal

RT5900 Radio

Terminal

IBM 3274

Control Unit

RC4030E

Gateway

6710 Access

Point

Ethernet Medium

Figure 1-5

Sample Open Wireless LAN

PEN*KEY 6400

Computers

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 1-15

SECTION 1

Introduction

1-16 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

Section 2 RT3210 Radio Terminal

" " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " "

Overview

" NOTE:

The RT3210 Radio Terminal is designed to appear to the host computer as an IBM 5291 Display Station. To help the system programmer design interfaces to the radio terminal, this section describes the screen size, screen modes, annunciators, keyboard, and IBM display emulation for the radio terminal as part of the 5250 data stream.

RT3210 Radio Terminals have UHF radios only.

RT3210 Radio Terminals are compatible with other radio terminals with UHF radio modules in the RT1100, RT1700, and RT5900 Series. This lets the RT3210 Radio Terminal work interchangeably with other radio terminals on a network.

On a UHF network the RT3210, RT1100, RT1700, and RT5900 operate at 4800 baud only.

You can set up the radio terminal through its firmware menus or from the host through the Set Parameters extended command. Extended commands are described in

Section 9. For information about firmware menus, refer to the radio terminal’s user guide.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 2-1

SECTION 2

RT3210 Radio Terminal

Screen Size

The RT3210 Radio Terminal has a 128 by 128 pixel supertwist liquid crystal display. The display shows terminal and host computer prompts, and data entered by the operator.

Because a 5291 Display Station has a screen size of 80 characters by 24 lines, the radio terminal presents a part of the information on the larger display station.

Character Sizes

The RT3210 Radio Terminal has two character sizes: a 5by 7-dot, or a 7- by 9- dot set. Each dot occupies one pixel on the LCD display. The 5- by 7-dot characters are smaller, but allow the operator to view a larger portion of the

1920-byte buffer represented on the display station.

When the radio terminal powers up, it defaults to a 7- by

9-dot character size. This yields a usable screen size of 9 rows by 16 columns. The bottom row is reserved for annunciators and system messages. The total number of characters this size can display is 144. By using the firmware menus or the Set Parameters extended command, you can change the character size to the smaller 5- by 7-dot pixel characters. This yields a usable screen size of 15 lines by

21 characters (the bottom row is reserved for system use).

The maximum number of characters with this size is 315.

2-2 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 2

RT3210 Radio Terminal

Screen Modes

The radio terminal has these screen modes: center cursor, corner, page, lazy, and locked. The modes present a window onto a standard 5291 Display Station’s 80-character by

24-line display buffer. You can set the type of screen mode through the radio terminal’s firmware menus.

You can move the cursor by using the four direction arrows on the radio terminal’s diamond-shaped keypad. When you try to move the cursor onto one of the boundaries, an error tone sounds and the display retains its last position.

The screen modes govern which portion of the larger 5291

Display Station’s screen the radio terminal first presents and how the window moves as the cursor moves.

Center Cursor Mode

Center cursor mode works best for applications that use the entire 5250 data stream’s 80-character by 24-line logical display. In this mode, the cursor remains in the center of the radio terminal’s window.

As the cursor moves within the window, the radio terminal’s display window moves to keep it centered. When the cursor moves off the right, left, top, or bottom edge of the 5291 Display Station, the window remains fixed despite the cursor’s movement.

Corner Mode

Corner mode begins with the window in the upper left corner of the larger 5291 Display Station. It keeps the cursor in the lower right corner of the display. Corner mode works best for applications that use the upper left corner of the logical screen.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 2-3

SECTION 2

RT3210 Radio Terminal

As the cursor moves off the right or bottom edge of the radio terminal’s display, the window moves to show the cursor.

When you use corner mode with the [FUNC] or [ALT] key, you can move the cursor a predetermined number of key presses in all four directions.

Page Mode

Page mode provides predefined pages within the larger

5291 Display Station. The size of these pages depends on the number of rows and columns selected for display. The radio terminal moves the window by a multiple of the page size. As the cursor moves off the edge of the radio terminal’s display, the window changes to the next page.

Lazy Mode

Lazy mode starts the cursor in the upper left corner of the display. The cursor moves across the display in the scrolled direction. When the cursor goes beyond the edge of the display, the data begins to move in the scrolled direction and the cursor remains at the edge of the display. When you try to go beyond an outside boundary, an error tone sounds.

Locked Mode

If locked mode is selected through the firmware menus, the view window is locked to the upper left-hand corner of the display.

The screen does not window around, and only the area that has been selected to be the screen size is visible. Locked mode disables the windowing keys, or only allows you to window around the physical display size selected through the firmware menus. Locked mode also moves the error line to the last position in the display.

2-4 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 2

RT3210 Radio Terminal

Annunciators

The RT3210 Radio Terminal’s display reserves a location for icons or small pictures, called “annunciators,” which show the radio terminal’s current status or operation in progress.

The following annunciators can appear in the radio terminal’s display.

The radio terminal is transmitting information to the base radio.

The radio terminal is receiving information from the base radio. This annunciator appears only when the information is for the radio terminal’s unique address number.

Communications loss. No communication with the host computer has occurred for at least

60 seconds. The radio terminal may be out of radio range, the base radio may not have power, or communications from the host computer to the base radio may not be properly set up.

The radio terminal’s keyboard is in function mode. The key you press on the keyboard in combination with [FUNC] returns the function assigned by the programmer, or does an operation. Key codes and operations are located just above the keys and to the left (black lettering).

The radio terminal’s keyboard is in alternate mode. The key you press on the keyboard in combination with [ALT] types the character or does the operation just above the key and to the right (yellow lettering).

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 2-5

SECTION 2

RT3210 Radio Terminal

The radio terminal’s keyboard is in shift mode.

The letters you press on the keyboard after you press [SFT] will be in uppercase, until you press

[SFT] again.

The battery needs to be recharged. When this annunciator appears, you have only two minutes of operating time left before the radio terminal disables operator input and radio communications. After two minutes, the message

“CONNECT UNIT TO CHARGER” blinks.

Recharging. The radio terminal is connected to a battery charger.

The radio terminal’s battery pack is fully

charged. This annunciator is used by the fast charge algorithm to indicate the fully charged condition.

High speed. The base radio is transmitting information at 9600 baud (versus 4800 baud).

Input inhibited. The keyboard has accepted enough information for the defined input field.

The “key ahead” feature stores keystrokes after this annunciator appears. These are saved for the next field.

Insert mode. The keyboard inserts characters instead of overwriting them.

Message waiting. The host has a message waiting for the radio terminal operator.

2-6 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 2

RT3210 Radio Terminal

Keyboard

The radio terminal’s 50-key keyboard (Figure 2-1) has shift keys, alphabetic keys, numeric keys, special characters, special function keys, and keys that do other operations.

Figure 2-1

RT3210 Keyboard

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 2-7

SECTION 2

RT3210 Radio Terminal

Shift Keys

Use the shift keys to type uppercase letters and special characters, and to do special functions. Shift keys are described in the following chart.

Shift Key

[SFT]

[FUNC]

[ALT]

Description

Press [SFT] plus a letter to type the letter in uppercase. The [SFT] key is located near the top of the keyboard.

The [FUNC] key puts the keyboard into function mode. Press the [FUNC] key plus a keyboard key to do an operation printed in black on the overlay.

The [ALT] key puts the keyboard into alternate mode. Press the [ALT] key plus a keyboard key to type a special character printed in yellow on the overlay.

Notice that the [FUNC] key is to the left of the [ALT] key.

Characters and operations printed on the overlay have the same relative relationship; the operation above a key and to the left (black lettering) indicates function mode, and the character above a key and to the right (yellow lettering) indicates alternate mode. For example:

To type the special character “@” (printed in yellow on the overlay and to the right of F1), press [ALT]+[A].

Press [FUNC]+[U] to do the [F21] function (printed in black on the overlay and to the left of the backslash).

When you press [SFT], [FUNC], or [ALT], an annunciator in the display indicates the current shift mode.

2-8 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 2

RT3210 Radio Terminal

Alphabetic Keys

Press a letter without first pressing [SFT] to type a lowercase letter. Press [SFT] plus a letter to type the letter in uppercase. For example, [SFT]+[A] types a capital “A.”

To lock the keyboard into shift mode, press

[BLACK]+[GOLD]. To unlock the keyboard, press

[BLACK]+[GOLD] again. The annunciator of a triangle pointing up means the keyboard is in shift mode.

Numeric Keys

Ten numeric keys are arranged in a 10-key format on the bottom half of the keyboard. Use them to enter numeric data.

Special Characters

Table 2-1 describes how to type special characters.

Table 2-1

RT3210 Special Characters

Special Character

@ (at)

-- (minus)

+ (plus)

( (left parenthesis)

$ (dollar)

) (right parenthesis)

Press

[ALT]+[A]

[ALT]+[B]

[ALT]+[C]

[ALT]+[D]

[ALT]+[E]

[ALT]+[F]

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 2-9

SECTION 2

RT3210 Radio Terminal

Table 2-1 (Continued)

RT3210 Special Characters

Special Character

# (pound)

* (asterisk)

% (percent)

/ (forward slash)

& (ampersand)

; (semicolon)

, (comma)

: (colon)

? (question mark)

_ (underscore)

{ (left brace)

} (right brace)

’ (single quote)

” (double quote)

\ (backslash)

= (equal)

< (left angle bracket)

> (right angle bracket)

~ (tilde)

| (vertical bar)

(not symbol)

¢ (cent)

! (exclamation mark)

| (piping symbol)

‘ (grave accent)

Press

[ALT]+[G]

[ALT]+[H]

[ALT]+[I]

[ALT]+[J]

[ALT]+[K]

[ALT]+[L]

[ALT]+[M]

[ALT]+[N]

[ALT]+[O]

[ALT]+[P]

[ALT]+[Q]

[ALT]+[R]

[ALT]+[S]

[ALT]+[T]

[ALT]+[U]

[ALT]+[V]

[ALT]+[W]

[ALT]+[X]

[ALT]+[Y]

[ALT]+[Z]

[ALT]+[ . ]

[ALT]+[SP]

[ALT]+[7]

[ALT]+[8]

[ALT]+[9]

2-10 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 2

RT3210 Radio Terminal

Special Function Keys

Special function keys are:

AID-generating keys

Cursor movement keys

Field Exit key

Signal keys

Special control keys

Special host keys

The following pages describe special function keys on the

RT3210 Radio Terminal. For complete descriptions refer to the appropriate IBM 5250 functions reference manual.

AID-Generating Keys

AID-generating keys generate AID codes that go in the display data stream to the host system. They alert the host system that the controller requires some action.

The RT3210 Radio Terminal emulates all of the AID-generating keys on a 5291 Display Station. Table 2-2 lists key sequences.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 2-11

SECTION 2

RT3210 Radio Terminal

5291 AID Key

Clear

Enter/Rec Adv

Help (nonerror state)

F1--F24

Record Backspace

(Home)

Roll - (Roll up/

Page down)

Roll ¯ (Roll down/

Page up)

Table 2-2

RT3210 AID-Generating Keys

Press

[FUNC]+[1]

Description

The system environment determines the results of this key. If the radio terminal is in session, [CLEAR] issues the AID code hex BD, which requests that the host system issue a Clear

Unit command to the RT3210 to clear the display. If not in session,

[CLEAR] clears the entire display regeneration buffer.

[ENTER]

[FUNC]+[2]

[Y]

Enters information.

Issues a hex F3 AID byte to the host system.

User-defined command functions.

[FUNC]+[A] --

[FUNC]+[X]

[FUNC]+[8]

[FUNC]+[RESET] When pressed with the cursor in the home position, a record backspace is requested. The AID code hex F8 and cursor address are sent to the host system.

[B]

Tells the controller that the operator wants to print the contents of the present display. Issues hex F6 to the host system.

Rolls display down one page; issues

AID code hex F5.

Rolls display up one page; issues AID code hex F4.

2-12 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 2

RT3210 Radio Terminal

Cursor Movement Keys

The four cursor control keys in the upper right corner of the keyboard move the cursor within the screen buffer. Each key moves the cursor in the direction indicated by the arrow.

Cursor left and right move the cursor one character position at a time in the display buffer. The cursor up and down keys move the cursor up or down one line. The screen mode governs how the radio terminal represents this movement.

Attempting to move the cursor off the screen in any direction causes the window to shift in the direction of movement. This feature allows you to move the viewing window around within the larger 5291 Display Station’s 80-character by 24-line screen (Figure 2-2).

INDOW DISPL

S THE TERMI

TO VIEW ANY

E ACTUAL 52

O MOVE ABOU

THE WINDOW DISPLAY MODE

ALLOWS THE TERMINAL

USER TO VIEW ANY PART

OF THE ACTUAL 5291 SCREEN

AND TO MOVE ABOUT THE

5291 SCREEN USING THE

CURSOR CONTROL KEY.

RT3210 Radio Terminal

Figure 2-2

RT3210 Windowing Mode

5291 Display Station

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 2-13

SECTION 2

RT3210 Radio Terminal

Cursor location is not limited to the current window. All cursor movement keys (for example, Field Exit, New Line, and the cursor keys) respond just as they would on the

80x24 display. For example, when you press the [FIELD +] key and the next field is outside the current window, the window moves to the new location.

Use the cursor control keys in combination with [FUNC] and [ALT] to move through the radio terminal’s display a single space at a time or eight spaces at a time. The following chart shows key combinations.

Forward tab

Reverse tab

Move 1 space right

Move 1 space left

Move 1 space up

Move 1 space down

Move 8 spaces right

Move 8 spaces left

Move 8 spaces up

Move 8 spaces down

Press

["]

[A]

[FUNC]+["]

[FUNC]+[A]

[FUNC]+[Y]

[FUNC]+[B]

[ALT]+["]

[ALT]+[A]

[ALT]+[Y]

[ALT]+[B]

Field Exit Key

Field Exit clears to the end of the field and tabs to the next field. The key on the RT3210 keyboard is [FIELD EXIT].

Signal Keys

Signal keys cause a Signal command to go from the controller to the host system. Signal keys are Attn and Help

(Table 2-3).

2-14 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 2

RT3210 Radio Terminal

Help (from error state)

Table 2-3

RT3210 Signal Keys

5291 Signal

Key

Attn

Press

[FUNC]+[3]

[FUNC]+[2]

Description

The operator presses this key to alert the host system that the function requested (for example, [ENTER]) is not being honored. Attn is valid when the keyboard is locked or unlocked. It does not change the keyboard state or the cursor location.

The operator uses this key to request that the host system send data about the error to the display.

Special Control Keys

Use the special control keys (Table 2-4) to change operatorgenerated information in the radio terminal’s display. The keys do not work when the keyboard is locked.

5291 Special

Control Key

Del

Display mode

Table 2-4

RT3210 Special Control Keys

Press

[FUNC]+[ ¬ ]

(None)

Description

Deletes the character in the position where the cursor was located. All remaining characters in the field shift to the left to fill the column.

You must set the radio terminal’s display contrast through the firmware menus.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 2-15

SECTION 2

RT3210 Radio Terminal

Table 2-4 (Continued)

RT3210 Special Control Keys

5291 Special

Control Key

Erase Input

Error Reset

Hex

Press

[FUNC]+[4]

[RESET]

[FUNC]+[Z]

Description

Clears all fields to nulls, and the cursor moves to the first input field.

Restores the original data on the error line of the display and resets the state.

Enters hexadecimal codes from the keyboard to generate any

EBCDIC characters needed for input or display.

Home

Insert

Shift Lock

[FUNC]+[RESET] Moves the cursor to the position specified by the insert cursor (IC) address.

[FUNC]+[5]

[FUNC]+[ALT]

Sets or turns off the insert mode for the input field the operator has the cursor in. The operator must reset the insert state before exiting it, by either pressing

[RESET] or [INSERT] again.

Puts the keyboard into shift lock mode.

Alternate cursor (None)

Display cursor location

(None)

You must change the cursor type through the firmware menus.

The radio terminal does not support this feature.

On the 5291 keyboard, it displays the cursor location.

2-16 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 2

RT3210 Radio Terminal

Special Host Keys

Special host keys are Sys Req and Test Request (Table 2-5).

Table 2-5

RT3210 Special Host Keys

5291 Special

Host Key

Sys Req

Press Description

[FUNC]+[7] Data on the error line is saved, the error line is cleared, a column separator and underscore field attribute are supplied to column 1 of the error line, and the cursor is located under column 2 to begin polling keystrokes.

Test Request (None) The radio terminal does not support Test Request.

Other Keys

Table 2-6 lists other radio terminal keys and their operations.

Operation

Backspace

Table 2-6

Other RT3210 Keys and Operations

Press

[ ¬ ]

[FUNC]+

[FIELD EXIT]

Description

Moves cursor one space to the left.

Brings up the radio terminal’s main menu and firmware parameters.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 2-17

SECTION 2

RT3210 Radio Terminal

Operation

Dup (duplicate enabled fields only)

(New Line)

Field--

Field+

Backlight

Table 2-6 (Continued)

Other RT3210 Keys and Operations

Press

[FUNC]+[0]

[FUNC]+[Y]

[FUNC]+[9]

[FUNC]+[6]

[FUNC]+[SP]

Description

Controller repeats hex

“1C” from the cursor position to the end of the field.

This shows in the display as an overstruck asterisk.

Moves cursor to beginning of next field.

For numeric fields, makes the input a negative number.

Advances cursor to the next input field. For numeric fields, makes the input a positive number.

Toggles display’s backlight on and off.

You can also use the keyboard to do key ahead, scan ahead, and repeat key operations.

Key Ahead

Key ahead stores keystrokes after the Input Inhibited annunciator appears, and saves them for the next input field.

The Input Inhibited annunciator appears on the status line while the radio terminal is waiting for the host to respond.

Key ahead is enabled as a default but can be disabled through the radio terminal’s firmware.

2-18 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 2

RT3210 Radio Terminal

Scan Ahead

Scan ahead stores one bar code after the Input Inhibited annunciator appears, and saves it for the next input field.

The Input Inhibited annunciator appears on the status line while waiting for the host to respond.

Key Repeat

Key repeat on the radio terminal’s keyboard is similar to the key repeat on a 5291 Display Station. For example, to fill an input field with the letter “a,” do one of the following:

Press the “A” key repeatedly until the field is full.

Press and hold the “A” key until the field is full.

Key repeat does not work with all keys. Table 2-7 shows which keys do and do not repeat.

Table 2-7

RT3210 Key Repeat

Repeating

Del

EBCDIC characters

Forward Tab

New Line

Reverse Tab

Cursor control keys used with [FUNC] and [ALT]

Nonrepeating

Alt

Attn

Backlight

Clear

Dup

Enter/Rec Adv

Erase Input

Error Reset

F1--F24

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 2-19

SECTION 2

RT3210 Radio Terminal

Repeating

Table 2-7 (Continued)

RT3210 Key Repeat

Nonrepeating

Field Exit

Field--

Field+

Func

Help

Hex

Home

Insert

Roll - (Roll up/Page down)

Roll ¯ (Roll down/Page up)

Shift

Shift Lock

Sys Req

System Messages

The radio terminal’s display reserves a line for status information. The status line can display system (nonlocal) information such as a message waiting from the host computer, help messages in response to the [HELP] key, or the system request state of the radio terminal.

System codes can also appear on the status line. System messages and codes are described in Section 8, “Display

Data Stream.”

2-20 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

Section 3 RT1100 Radio Terminal

" " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " "

Overview

" NOTE:

The RT1100 Radio Terminal is designed to appear to the host computer as an IBM 5291 Display Station. To help the system programmer design interfaces to the radio terminal, this section describes the screen size, screen modes, annunciators, keyboard, and IBM display emulation for the radio terminal as part of the 5250 data stream.

Radio terminals in the RT1100 Series have UHF, 900 MHz, or WLIF radio modules.

RT1100 Radio Terminals are compatible with RT3210 (UHF only), RT1700, and RT5900 Radio Terminals; and

PEN*KEY R 6400 Computers (900 MHz and WLIF only).

This lets the RT1100 Radio Terminal work interchangeably with other wireless stations on a network.

You can set up the radio terminal through its firmware menus or from the host through the Set Parameters extended command. Extended commands are described in

Section 9. For information about firmware menus, refer to the radio terminal’s user guide.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 3-1

SECTION 3

RT1100 Radio Terminal

Screen Size

The RT1100 Radio Terminal has a supertwist, liquid crystal display with 4, 6, 8, or 9 lines with 12 or 16 characters per line. You can set the screen size through the radio terminal’s firmware menus.

The display shows radio terminal and host computer prompts, as well as data entered by the operator. Because a

5291 Display Station has a screen size of 80 characters by

24 lines, the radio terminal presents a part of the information on the larger display station.

Screen Modes

The radio terminal has these screen modes: center cursor, corner, page, lazy, and locked. The modes present a window onto a standard 5291 Display Station’s 80-character by

24-line display buffer. You can set the type of screen mode through the radio terminal’s firmware menus.

The screen modes govern which portion of the larger 5291

Display Station’s screen the radio terminal first presents and how the window moves as the cursor moves.

Center Cursor Mode

3-2 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 3

RT1100 Radio Terminal

Corner Mode

As the cursor moves off the right or bottom edge of the radio terminal’s display, the window moves to show the cursor.

When you use corner mode with the gold-colored key, you can move the cursor a predetermined number of key presses in all four directions.

Page Mode

Page mode provides predefined pages within the larger

Lazy Mode

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 3-3

SECTION 3

RT1100 Radio Terminal

Locked Mode

If locked mode is selected through the firmware menus, the view window is locked to the upper left-hand corner of the display. The screen does not window around, and only the area that has been selected to be the screen size is visible.

Locked mode disables the windowing keys, or only allows you to window around the physical display size selected through the firmware menus. Locked mode also moves the error line to the last position in the display.

Annunciators

The RT1100 Radio Terminal’s display reserves a location for icons or small pictures, called “annunciators,” which show the radio terminal’s current status or operation in progress.

The following annunciators can appear in the radio terminal’s display.

The radio terminal is transmitting information to the base radio.

Communications loss. The radio terminal cannot communicate with the host computer. The radio terminal may be out of radio range, the base radio may not have power, or communication from the host to the access point may not be properly set up.

The radio terminal’s keyboard is in shift mode. The letter key you press while the keyboard is in this mode types the letter in uppercase.

The radio terminal’s keyboard is in black shift mode. The key you press while the keyboard is in this mode does the operation printed in black on the overlay and to the upper left of the key.

3-4 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 3

RT1100 Radio Terminal

The radio terminal’s keyboard is in gold shift mode. The key you press while the keyboard is in this mode types the special character or does the operation printed in gold on the overlay and to the upper right of the key.

Input inhibited. The keyboard has accepted enough information for the defined input field. The

“key ahead” feature stores keystrokes after “input inhibited” appears. These are saved for the next field.

Insert mode. The keyboard inserts characters instead of overwriting them.

Message waiting. The host has a message waiting for the radio terminal operator.

The battery is charging.

The battery needs to be recharged. When this annunciator appears, you will not be able to operate your radio terminal until you place it on a charger.

Laser scanner is in use. This annunciator ensures you are aware of the laser scanner and the cautions you must exercise. Read and obey the caution labels on your laser scanner so that you do not injure your eyes.

Keyboard

The radio terminal’s 47-key keyboard (Figure 3-1) has shift keys, alphabetic keys, numeric keys, special characters, special function keys, and keys that do other operations.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 3-5

SECTION 3

RT1100 Radio Terminal

ON/OFF

RESET

SHIFT

W W

@ F2

F11 &

) F7

F12

F16 _

F21 \

HEX |

SYS REQ

-F3

# F8

; F13

F17

F22 =

{ F18 }

F23 <

HOME !

‘

DEL

+ F4

* F9

, F14

F19

F24 >

(

’

| ROLL

7 8

ERASE INPUT INSERT

ROLL

F10 /

F15 ?

F20 ”

4 5 6

HELP ATTN CLEAR

1 2 3

FIELD- FIELD+ DUP

0 ENTER

Unlabeled key colors:

Black

Gold

Brown

Figure 3-1

RT1100 Keyboard

3-6 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 3

RT1100 Radio Terminal

Shift Keys

Use the shift keys to type uppercase letters and special characters, and to do special functions. Shift keys are described in the following chart.

Shift Key

[SHIFT]

[GOLD]

[BLACK]

Description

Press the brown-colored [SHIFT] key plus a letter to type the letter in uppercase. The [SHIFT] key is located near the top of the keyboard.

The gold-colored key puts the keyboard into gold shift mode. Press the [GOLD] key plus a keyboard key to type a special character or do an operation printed in gold on the overlay.

The black-colored key puts the keyboard into black shift mode. Press the [BLACK] key plus a keyboard key to do an operation printed in black on the overlay.

The special characters and functions printed on the overlay are color-coded to correspond with the shift keys. For example:

To type the special character “@” (printed in gold on the overlay), press [GOLD]+[A].

Press [BLACK]+[U] to do the [F21] function (printed in black on the overlay).

When you press [SHIFT], [GOLD], or [BLACK], an annunciator in the display indicates the current shift mode.

One of the keys on the keyboard — the [FIELD EXIT] key

— has its operation printed to the left of it. The operation printed to the left is its unshifted value. The operations printed above [FIELD EXIT] are the shifted values.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 3-7

SECTION 3

RT1100 Radio Terminal

Alphabetic Keys

Press a letter without first pressing [SHIFT] to type a lowercase letter. Press [SHIFT] plus a letter to type the letter in uppercase. For example, [SHIFT]+[A] types a capital

“A.”

To lock the keyboard into shift mode, press [BLACK]+

[GOLD]. To unlock the keyboard, press [BLACK]+[GOLD] again. The annunciator of a triangle pointing up means the keyboard is in shift mode.

Numeric Keys

Ten numeric keys are arranged in a 10-key format on the bottom half of the keyboard. Use them to enter numeric data.

Special Characters

Table 3-1 describes how to type special characters.

Table 3-1

RT1100 Special Characters

Special Character

@ (at)

-- (minus)

+ (plus)

( (left parenthesis)

$ (dollar)

Press

[GOLD]+[A]

[GOLD]+[B]

[GOLD]+[C]

[GOLD]+[D]

[GOLD]+[E]

3-8 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 3

RT1100 Radio Terminal

Table 3-1 (Continued)

RT1100 Special Characters

Special Character

) (right parenthesis)

# (pound)

* (asterisk)

% (percent)

/ (forward slash)

& (ampersand)

; (semicolon)

, (comma)

: (colon)

? (question mark)

_ (underscore)

{ (left brace)

} (right brace)

’ (single quote)

” (double quote)

\ (backslash)

= (equal)

< (left angle bracket)

> (right angle bracket)

~ (tilde)

| (vertical bar)

! (exclamation mark)

‘ (grave accent)

| (piping symbol)

¢ (cent)

. (period)

(not symbol)

Press

[GOLD]+[F]

[GOLD]+[G]

[GOLD]+[H]

[GOLD]+[I]

[GOLD]+[J]

[GOLD]+[K]

[GOLD]+[L]

[GOLD]+[M]

[GOLD]+[N]

[GOLD]+[O]

[GOLD]+[P]

[GOLD]+[Q]

[GOLD]+[R]

[GOLD]+[S]

[GOLD]+[T]

[GOLD]+[U]

[GOLD]+[V]

[GOLD]+[W]

[GOLD]+[X]

[GOLD]+[Y]

[GOLD]+[Z]

[GOLD]+[SP]

[GOLD]+[7]

[GOLD]+[8]

[GOLD]+[9]

[GOLD]+[5]

[GOLD]+[6]

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 3-9

SECTION 3

RT1100 Radio Terminal

Special Function Keys

Special function keys are:

AID-generating keys

Cursor movement keys

Field Exit key

Signal keys

Special control keys

Special host keys

The following pages describe special function keys on the

RT1100 Radio Terminal. For complete descriptions refer to the appropriate IBM 5250 functions reference manual.

AID-Generating Keys

AID-generating keys generate AID codes that go in the display data stream to the host system. They alert the host system that the controller requires some action.

The RT1100 Radio Terminal emulates all of the AID-generating keys on a 5291 Display Station. Table 3-2 lists key sequences.

3-10 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 3

RT1100 Radio Terminal

5291 AID Key

Clear

Enter/Rec Adv

Help (nonerror state) [BLACK]+[2]

F1-- F24

Record Backspace

(Home)

Roll - (Roll up/

Page down)

Roll ¯ (Roll down/

Page up)

Table 3-2

RT1100 AID-Generating Keys

Press

[BLACK]+[1]

[ENTER]

[BLACK]+[A] --

[BLACK]+[X]

[BLACK]+[8]

[BLACK]+[SP]

[BLACK]+[6]

[BLACK]+[9]

Description

The system environment determines the results of this key. If the radio terminal is in session, [CLEAR] issues the AID code hex BD, which requests that the host system issue a Clear Unit command to the RT1100 to clear the display. If not in session, [CLEAR] clears the entire display regeneration buffer.

Enters information.

Issues a hex F3 AID byte to the host system.

User-defined command functions.

Tells the controller that the operator wants to print the contents of the present display. Issues hex F6 to the host system.

When pressed with the cursor in the home position, a record backspace is requested. The AID code hex F8 and cursor address are sent to the host system.

Rolls display down one page; issues AID code hex F5.

Rolls display up one page; issues AID code hex F4.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 3-11

SECTION 3

RT1100 Radio Terminal

Cursor Movement Keys

The four cursor control keys at the top of the keyboard move the cursor within the screen buffer. Each key moves the cursor in the direction indicated by the arrow.

INDOW DISPL

S THE TERMI

TO VIEW ANY

E ACTUAL 52

O MOVE ABOU

THE WINDOW DISPLAY MODE

ALLOWS THE TERMINAL

USER TO VIEW ANY PART

OF THE ACTUAL 5291 SCREEN

AND TO MOVE ABOUT THE

5291 SCREEN USING THE

CURSOR CONTROL KEY.

RT1100 Radio Terminal

Figure 3-2

RT1100 Windowing Mode

5291 Display Station

3-12 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 3

RT1100 Radio Terminal

Cursor location is not limited to the current window. All cursor movement keys (for example, Field Exit, New Line, and the cursor keys) respond just as they would on the

80x24 display. For example, when you press the [FIELD +] key and the next field is outside the current window, the window moves to the new location.

Use the cursor control keys in combination with [BLACK] and [GOLD] to move through the radio terminal’s display a single space at a time or eight spaces at a time. The following chart shows key combinations.

Move 8 spaces right

Move 8 spaces left

Move 8 spaces up

Move 8 spaces down

Move 1 space right

Move 1 space left

Move 1 space up

Move 1 space down

Press

[BLACK]+["]

[BLACK]+[A]

[BLACK]+[Y]

[BLACK]+[B]

[GOLD]+["]

[GOLD]+[A]

[GOLD]+[Y]

[GOLD]+[B]

Field Exit Key

Field Exit clears to the end of the field and tabs to the next field. The key on the RT1100 keyboard is [FIELD EXIT], which is the brown-colored key in the lower left corner of the keyboard.

Signal Keys

Signal keys cause a Signal command to go from the controller to the host system. Signal keys are Attn and Help

(Table 3-3).

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 3-13

SECTION 3

RT1100 Radio Terminal

Table 3-3

RT1100 Signal Keys

5291 Signal Key

Attn

Help (from error state)

Press

[BLACK]+[3]

[BLACK]+[2]

Description

The operator uses this key to request that the host system send data about the error to the display.

Special Control Keys

Use the special control keys (Table 3-4) to change operatorgenerated information in the radio terminal’s display. The keys do not work when the keyboard is locked.

5291 Special

Control Key

Del

Display mode

Table 3-4

RT1100 Special Control Keys

Press

[BLACK]+[ ¬ ]

(None)

Description

Deletes the character in the position where the cursor was located. All remaining characters in the field shift to the left to fill the column.

You must set the radio terminal’s display contrast through the firmware menus.

3-14 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 3

RT1100 Radio Terminal

Table 3-4 (Continued)

RT1100 Special Control Keys

5291 Special

Control Key

Erase Input

Error Reset

Hex

Press

[BLACK]+[4]

[RESET]

[BLACK]+[Z]

Description

Clears all fields to nulls, and the cursor moves to the first input field.

Restores the original data on the error line of the display and resets the state.

Enters hexadecimal codes from the keyboard to generate any EBCDIC characters needed for input or display.

Home

Insert

Shift Lock

Display cursor location

[BLACK]+[SP] Moves the cursor to the position specified by the insert cursor (IC) address.

[BLACK]+[5] Sets or turns off the insert mode for the input field the operator has the cursor in. The operator must reset the insert state before exiting it, by either pressing

[RESET] or [Insert] again.

[BLACK]+[GOLD] Puts the keyboard into shift lock mode.

Alternate cursor (None)

(None)

You must change the cursor type through the firmware menus.

The radio terminal does not support this feature.

On the 5291 keyboard, it displays the cursor location.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 3-15

SECTION 3

RT1100 Radio Terminal

Special Host Keys

Special host keys are Sys Req and Test Request (Table 3-5).

Table 3-5

RT1100 Special Host Keys

5291 Special

Host Key

Sys Req

Press Description

[BLACK]+[7] Data on the error line is saved, the error line is cleared, a column separator and underscore field attribute are supplied to column 1 of the error line, and the cursor is located under column 2 to begin polling keystrokes.

Test Request (None) The radio terminal does not support Test Request.

Other Keys

Table 3-6 lists other radio terminal keys and their operations.

3-16 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 3

RT1100 Radio Terminal

Operation

Backspace

(New Line)

Field--

Field+

Forward Tab

Reverse Tab

Backlight

Table 3-6

Other RT1100 Keys and Operations

Dup (duplicate enabled fields only)

[

Press

¬ ]

Description

Moves cursor one space to the left.

[GOLD]+

[BLACK]

Brings up the radio terminal’s main menu and firmware parameters.

[BLACK]+[0] Controller repeats hex

“1C” from the cursor position to the end of the field.

This shows in the display as an overstruck asterisk.

[BLACK]+[Y] Moves cursor to beginning of next field.

[BLACK]+

[BROWN]

[GOLD]+

[BROWN]

For numeric fields, makes the input a negative number.

Advances cursor to the next input field. For numeric fields, makes the input a positive number.

Forward tabs.

Reverse tabs.

[GOLD]+[0] Toggles the display’s backlight on and off.

You can also use the keyboard to key ahead and scan ahead operations.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 3-17

SECTION 3

RT1100 Radio Terminal

Key Ahead

Key ahead stores keystrokes after the Input Inhibited annunciator appears, and saves them for the next input field. The Input Inhibited annunciator appears on the status line while the radio terminal is waiting for the host to respond. Key ahead is enabled as a default but can be disabled through the radio terminal’s firmware.

Scan Ahead

Scan ahead stores one bar code after the Input Inhibited annunciator appears, and saves it for the next input field.

The Input Inhibited annunciator appears on the status line while waiting for the host to respond.

System Messages

System codes can also appear on the status line. System messages and codes are described in Section 8, “Display

Data Stream.”

3-18 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

Section 4 RT1700 Radio Terminal

" " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " "

Overview

" NOTE:

The RT1700 Radio Terminal is designed to appear to the host computer as an IBM 5291 Display Station. To help the system programmer design interfaces to the radio terminal, this section describes the screen size, screen modes, annunciators, keyboards, and IBM display emulation for the radio terminal as part of the 5250 data stream.

Radio terminals in the RT1700 Series have UHF, 900 MHz, or WLIF radio modules.

RT1700 Radio Terminals are compatible with RT3210 (UHF radio only), RT1100, and RT5900 Radio Terminals; and

PEN*KEY R 6400 Computers (900 MHz and WLIF only).

This lets the RT1700 Radio Terminal work interchangeably with other wireless stations on a network.

You can set up the radio terminal through its firmware menus or from the host through the Set Parameters extended command. Extended commands are described in

Section 9. For information about firmware menus, refer to the radio terminal’s user guide.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 4-1

SECTION 4

RT1700 Radio Terminal

Screen Size

The RT1700 Radio Terminal has a supertwist, liquid crystal display with 12, 17, 22, or 26 characters per line by 4, 6, 8,

10, 12, 15, or 21 lines. You can set the screen size through the radio terminal’s firmware menus.

The display shows radio terminal and host computer prompts, as well as data entered by the operator. Because a

5291 Display Station has a screen size of 80 characters by

24 lines, the radio terminal presents a part of the information on the larger display station.

Screen Modes

The radio terminal has these screen modes: center cursor, corner, page, lazy, and locked. The modes present a window onto a standard 5291 Display Station’s 80-character by

24-line display buffer. You can set the type of screen mode through the radio terminal’s firmware menus.

The screen modes govern which portion of the larger 5291

Display Station’s screen the radio terminal first presents and how the window moves as the cursor moves.

Center Cursor Mode

As the cursor moves within the window, the radio terminal’s display window moves to keep it centered. When the cursor moves off the right, left, top, or bottom edge of the larger

80x24 display, the window remains fixed despite the cursor’s movement.

4-2 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 4

RT1700 Radio Terminal

Corner Mode

As the cursor moves off the right or bottom edge of the radio terminal’s display, the window moves to show the cursor.

When you use corner mode with the gold-colored key, you can move the cursor a predetermined number of key presses in all four directions.

Page Mode

Page mode provides predefined pages within the larger

Lazy Mode

Lazy mode starts the cursor in the upper left corner of the display. The cursor moves across the display in the scrolled direction. When the cursor goes beyond the edge of the display, the data begins to move in the scrolled direction and the cursor remains at the edge of the display. When you try to move the cursor beyond an outside boundary, an error tone sounds.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 4-3

SECTION 4

RT1700 Radio Terminal

Locked Mode

Annunciators

The RT1700 Radio Terminal’s display reserves a location for icons or small pictures, called “annunciators,” which show the radio terminal’s current status or operation in progress.

The following annunciators can appear in the radio terminal’s display.

The radio terminal is transmitting information to the base radio.

The radio terminal’s keyboard is in shift mode. The letter key you press while the keyboard is in this mode types the letter in uppercase.

4-4 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 4

RT1700 Radio Terminal

The radio terminal’s keyboard is in black shift mode. The key you press while the keyboard is in this mode does the operation printed in black on the overlay and to the upper left of the key.

X Input inhibited. The keyboard has accepted enough information for the defined input field. The

“key ahead” feature stores keystrokes after this annunciator appears. These are saved for the next field.

Insert mode. The keyboard inserts characters instead of overwriting them.

Message waiting. The host has a message waiting for the radio terminal operator.

The battery is charging.

The battery needs to be recharged. When this annunciator appears, you will not be able to operate your radio terminal until you place it on a charger.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 4-5

SECTION 4

RT1700 Radio Terminal

Keyboard

The RT1700 Radio Terminal has either a standard 57-key keyboard or a 37-key keyboard.

57-Key Keyboard

The 57-key keyboard (Figure 4-1) has shift keys, alphabetic keys, numeric keys, special characters, special function keys, and keys that do other operations.

37-Key Keyboard

The 37-key keyboard (Figure 4-2) has standard numeric keys, an [ENTER] key, and user-defined function keys in its primary plane. It has alphabetic keys in its secondary plane, and the special character

“ . ” (period).

Because a radio terminal with a 37-key keyboard does not have alphabetic keys, follow these procedures when using its firmware and downloading software to it:

To access password-protected menus, press [F12] and then [F11], and then enter the password. For example, the password for the SET-UP PARMS menu is

52401.

To initiate the COLD START? menu option, press

[F10] to answer “yes.”

To download software, hold down the [F1] key as you power up the radio terminal to go into download mode.

This is similar to holding down the [I] key on the standard 57-key keyboard.

4-6 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 4

RT1700 Radio Terminal

¬ W ® W SCAN W W

ON/OFF

F17 F10

F18 F11

F19 F12

F20

RESET

SHIFT

F13

F21 F14

F22 F15

F23 F16

F24

HEX

)

HOME

{

;

}

DEL

SYS REQ

‘ PRINT

ERASE INPUT

INSERT

(

’

ROLL

”

CLEAR

FIELD-- FIELD+

HELP

DUP

ATTN

ENTER

RT1700 SERIES

Unlabeled key colors:

Black

Gold

Brown

Figure 4-1

RT1700 57-Key Keyboard

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 4-7

SECTION 4

RT1700 Radio Terminal

¬ W ® W SCAN W W

ON/OFF

RESET

SHIFT

Y .

HEX Z DUP

A F13

E F17

I F21

M HOME

F14 C F15

F18

J F22

F10

N DEL

G F19

K F23

F11

F16

F20

L F24

F12

O SYS REQ

PRINT Q ROLL

R ERASE INPUT S

4 5

INSERT T ROLL

CLEAR V

HELP W

ATTN

FIELD-- FIELD+ X

0 ENTER

RT1700 SERIES

Figure 4-2

RT1700 37-Key Keyboard

Unlabeled key colors:

Black

Gold

Brown

4-8 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 4

RT1700 Radio Terminal

Shift Keys

Use the shift keys on the 57- and 37-key keyboards to type uppercase letters and special characters, and to do special functions. Shift keys are described in the following chart.

Shift Key

[SHIFT]

[GOLD]

[BLACK]

Description

Press the [SHIFT] key plus a letter to type the letter in uppercase. The [SHIFT] key is located near the top of the keyboard.

The gold-colored key puts the keyboard into gold shift mode. Press [GOLD] plus a keyboard key to type a character or do an operation printed in gold on the overlay.

The black-colored key puts the keyboard into black shift mode. Press [BLACK] plus a keyboard key to do an operation printed in black on the overlay.

The special characters and functions printed on the overlay are color-coded to correspond with the shift keys. For example:

On the 57-key keyboard, to type the special character

“@” (printed in gold on the overlay), press [GOLD]+[A].

On the 57-key keyboard, press [BLACK]+[F5] to do the F13 function (printed in black on the overlay).

On the 37-key keyboard, press [BLACK]+[F1] to do the F13 function (printed in black on the overlay).

The [FIELD EXIT] key has its operation printed to the left of it. The operation printed to the left is its unshifted value.

The operations printed above [FIELD EXIT] are the shifted values.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 4-9

SECTION 4

RT1700 Radio Terminal

Alphabetic Keys

On the 57-key keyboard, press a letter without first pressing [SHIFT] to type a lowercase letter. Press [SHIFT] plus a letter to type the letter in uppercase. For example,

[SHIFT]+[A] types a capital “A.”

Table 4-1 describes how to type letters on the 37-key keyboard.

Letter

A--L

O--W

X a--l m n y z o--w x

Table 4-1

RT1700 Letters, 37-Key Keyboard

Press (37-Key Keyboard)

[SHIFT]+[F1] -- [SHIFT]+[F12]

[SHIFT]+[SP]

[SHIFT]+[ ¬ ]

[SHIFT]+[7] -- [SHIFT]+[3]

[SHIFT]+[0]

[SHIFT]+[ . ]

[SHIFT]+[ ]

[BLACK]+[F1] -- [BLACK]+[F12]

[BLACK]+[SP]

[BLACK]+[ ¬ ]

[BLACK]+[7] -- [BLACK]+[3]

[BLACK]+[0]

[BLACK]+[ . ]

[BLACK]+[ ]

To lock the keyboard into shift mode, press

[BLACK]+[GOLD]. To unlock the keyboard, press

[BLACK]+[GOLD] again. The annunciator of a triangle pointing up means the keyboard is in shift mode.

4-10 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 4

RT1700 Radio Terminal

Numeric Keys

Numeric keys are arranged in a 10-key format on the bottom half of the 57- and 37-key keyboards. Use the numbers to enter numeric data.

Special Characters

Table 4-2 describes how to type special characters on the

57-key keyboard. The special character available on the

37-key keyboard is a “ . ” (period).

Table 4-2

RT1700 Special Characters

Special Character

@ (at)

-- (minus)

+ (plus)

( (left parenthesis)

$ (dollar)

) (right parenthesis)

# (pound)

* (asterisk)

% (percent)

/ (forward slash)

& (ampersand)

; (semicolon)

, (comma)

: (colon)

? (question mark)

_ (underscore)

{ (left brace)

Press (57-Key Keyboard)

[GOLD]+[A]

[GOLD]+[B]

[GOLD]+[C]

[GOLD]+[D]

[GOLD]+[E]

[GOLD]+[F]

[GOLD]+[G]

[GOLD]+[H]

[GOLD]+[I]

[GOLD]+[J]

[GOLD]+[K]

[GOLD]+[L]

[GOLD]+[M]

[GOLD]+[N]

[GOLD]+[O]

[GOLD]+[P]

[GOLD]+[Q]

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 4-11

SECTION 4

RT1700 Radio Terminal

Table 4-2 (Continued)

RT1700 Special Characters

Special Character

} (right brace)

’ (single quote)

” (double quote)

\ (backslash)

= (equal)

< (left angle bracket)

> (right angle bracket)

~ (tilde)

| (vertical bar)

! (exclamation mark)

‘ (grave accent)

| (piping symbol)

¢ (cent)

. (period)

(not symbol)

Press (57-Key Keyboard)

[GOLD]+[R]

[GOLD]+[S]

[GOLD]+[T]

[GOLD]+[U]

[GOLD]+[V]

[GOLD]+[W]

[GOLD]+[X]

[GOLD]+[Y]

[GOLD]+[Z]

[GOLD]+[SP]

[GOLD]+[7]

[GOLD]+[8]

[GOLD]+[9]

[GOLD]+[5]

[GOLD]+[6]

Special Function Keys

Special function keys are:

AID-generating keys

Cursor movement keys

Field Exit key

Signal keys

Special control keys

Special host keys

4-12 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 4

RT1700 Radio Terminal

The following pages briefly describe the special function keys on the RT1700 Radio Terminal. For complete descriptions, refer to the appropriate IBM 5250 functions reference manual.

5291 AID Key

F1 -- F8

F9 -- F12

F13 -- F16

F17 -- F24

Clear

AID-Generating Keys

AID-generating keys generate AID codes that go in the display data stream to the host system. They alert the host system that the controller requires some action. Table 4-3 shows key combinations.

57-Key

Table 4-3

RT1700 AID-Generating Keys

Keyboard

[F1] -- [F8]

[BLACK]+[F1] --

[BLACK]+[F4]

[BLACK]+[F5] --

[BLACK]+[F8]

[GOLD]+[F1] --

[GOLD]+[F8]

[BLACK]+[1]

37-Key

Keyboard

[F1] -- [F8]

[F9] -- [F12]

[GOLD]+[F1] --

[GOLD]+[F4]

[GOLD]+[F5] --

[GOLD]+[F12]

[GOLD]+[1]

Description

User-defined function.

The system environment determines the results of this key. If the radio terminal is in session, it issues the AID code hex

BD, which requests that the host system issue a

Clear Unit command to the RT1700 to clear the display. If not in session,

[CLEAR] clears the entire display regeneration buffer.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 4-13

SECTION 4

RT1700 Radio Terminal

5291 AID Key

Enter/Rec Adv

Help

(nonerror state)

Record

Backspace(Home)

Roll - (Roll up/

Page down)

Roll ¯ (Roll down/

Page up)

Table 4-3 (Continued)

RT1700 AID-Generating Keys

57-Key

Keyboard

[ENTER]

[BLACK]+[2]

37-Key

Keyboard

[ENTER]

[GOLD]+[2]

[BLACK]+[8]

[BLACK]+[SP]

[BLACK]+[6]

[BLACK]+[9]

[GOLD]+[8]

[GOLD]+[SP]

[GOLD]+[6]

[GOLD]+[9]

Description

Enters information.

Issues a hex F3 AID byte to the host system.

Tells the controller that the operator wants to print the contents of the present display. Issues hex F6 to the host system.

When pressed with the cursor in the home position, a record backspace is requested. The AID code hex F8 and cursor address are sent to the host system.

Rolls display down one page; issues AID code hex

F5.

Rolls display up one page; issues AID code hex F4.

Cursor Movement

The four cursor control keys at the top of the keyboard move the cursor within the screen buffer. Each key moves the cursor in the direction indicated by the arrow.

4-14 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 4

RT1700 Radio Terminal

INDOW DISPL

S THE TERMI

TO VIEW ANY

E ACTUAL 52

O MOVE ABOU

THE WINDOW DISPLAY MODE

ALLOWS THE TERMINAL

USER TO VIEW ANY PART

OF THE ACTUAL 5291 SCREEN

AND TO MOVE ABOUT THE

5291 SCREEN USING THE

CURSOR CONTROL KEY.

RT1700 Radio Terminal

Figure 4-3

RT1700 Windowing Mode

5291 Display Station

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 4-15

SECTION 4

RT1700 Radio Terminal

Cursor location is not limited to the current window. All cursor movement keys (for example, Field Exit, New Line, and the cursor keys) respond just as they would on the

80x24 display. For example, when you press the [FIELD+] key and the next field is outside the current window, the window moves to the new location.

Forward tab

Reverse tab

Move 8 spaces right

Move 8 spaces left

Move 8 spaces up

Move 8 spaces down

Move 1 space right

Move 1 space left

Move 1 space up

Move 1 space down

Press

[GOLD]+["]

[GOLD]+[A]

[BLACK]+["]

[BLACK]+[A]

[BLACK]+[Y]

[BLACK]+[B]

[GOLD]+["]

[GOLD]+[A]

[GOLD]+[Y]

[GOLD]+[B]

Field Exit

Field Exit clears to the end of the field and tabs to the next field. The key on the RT1700 keyboard is [FIELD EXIT], which is the brown-colored key in the lower left corner of the 57- and 37-key keyboards.

4-16 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 4

RT1700 Radio Terminal

Signal Keys

Signal keys cause a Signal command to go from the controller to the host system. Signal keys are Attn and Help.

Table 4-4 shows key combinations.

5291 Signal

Key

Attn

Help (from error state)

Table 4-4

RT1700 Signal Keys

57-Key

Keyboard

37-Key

Keyboard Description

[BLACK]+[3] [GOLD]+[3] The operator presses this key to alert the host system that the function requested (for example,

[ENTER]) is not being honored.

Attn is valid when the keyboard is locked or unlocked. It does not change the keyboard state or the cursor location.

[BLACK]+[2] [GOLD]+[2] The operator uses this key to request that the host system send data about the error to the display.

Special Control Keys

Use the special control keys to change operator-generated information in the radio terminal’s display. The keys do not work when the keyboard is locked. Table 4-5 shows key combinations.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 4-17

SECTION 4

RT1700 Radio Terminal

5291 Special

Control Key

Del

Display Mode

Erase Input

Error Reset

Hex

Home

Insert

Shift Lock

Table 4-5

RT1700 Special Control Keys

57-Key

Keyboard

37-Key

Keyboard

[BLACK]+[ ¬ ] [GOLD]+[ ¬ ]

None

[BLACK]+[4]

[BLACK]+

[SHIFT]

[BLACK]+[Z]

None

[GOLD]+[4]

[GOLD]+[ . ]

[BLACK]+[SP] [GOLD]+[SP]

[BLACK]+[5]

[BLACK]+

[GOLD]

[BLACK]+

[SHIFT]

[GOLD]+[5]

[BLACK]+

[GOLD]

Description

Deletes the character in the position where the cursor was located. All remaining characters in the field shift to the left to fill the column.

You must set the radio terminal’s display contrast through the firmware menus.

Clears all fields to nulls, and the cursor moves to the first input field.

Restores the original data on the error line of the display and resets the state.

Enters hexadecimal codes from the keyboard to generate any EBCDIC characters needed for input or display.

Moves the cursor to the position specified by the insert cursor (IC) address.

Sets or turns off the insert mode for the input field the operator has the cursor in. The operator must reset the insert state before exiting it, by either pressing [RESET] or

[Insert] again.

Puts the keyboard into shift lock mode.

4-18 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 4

RT1700 Radio Terminal

Table 4-5 (Continued)

RT1700 Special Control Keys

5291 Special

Control Key

57-Key

Keyboard

Alternate cursor (None)

37-Key

Keyboard

(None)

Display cursor location

(None) (None)

Description

You must change the cursor type through the firmware menus.

The radio terminal does not support this feature.

On the 5291 keyboard, it displays the cursor location.

Special Host Keys

Special host keys are Sys Req and Test Request. Table 4-6 shows key combinations.

Table 4-6

RT1700 Special Host Keys

5291 Special

Host Key

Sys Req

57-Key

Keyboard

37-Key

Keyboard Description

[BLACK]+[7] [GOLD]+[7] Data on the error line is saved, the error line is cleared, a column separator and underscore field attribute are supplied to column 1 of the error line, and the cursor is located under column 2 to begin polling keystrokes.

Test Request (None) (None) The radio terminal does not support

Test Request.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 4-19

SECTION 4

RT1700 Radio Terminal

Other Keys

Table 4-7 lists other radio terminal keys and their operations.

Table 4-7

Other RT1700 Keys and Operations

Operation

Backspace

Dup (duplicate enabled fields only)

[

57-Key

Keyboard

¬ ]

37-Key

Keyboard

[ ¬ ]

Description

Moves cursor one space to the left.

[GOLD]+

[BLACK]

[GOLD]+

[BLACK]

Brings up the radio terminal’s main menu and firmware parameters.

[BLACK]+[0] [GOLD]+ [ ] Controller repeats hex 1C from the cursor position to the end of the field. This shows in the display as an overstruck asterisk.

(New Line) [BLACK]+[Y] [ ]

Field--

Field+

Backlight

[BLACK]+

[BROWN]

[GOLD]+

[BROWN]

[GOLD]+[0]

[BLACK]+

[BROWN]

[GOLD]+

[BROWN]

[GOLD]+[0]

Moves cursor to beginning of next field.

For numeric fields, makes the input a negative number.

Advances cursor to the next input field. For numeric fields, makes the input a positive number.

Toggles the display’s backlight on and off.

4-20 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 4

RT1700 Radio Terminal

You can also use the keyboard to do key ahead, scan ahead, and repeat key operations.

Key Ahead

Key ahead stores keystrokes after the Input Inhibited annunciator appears, and saves them for the next input field.

The Input Inhibited annunciator appears on the status line while the radio terminal is waiting for the host to respond.

Key ahead is enabled as a default but can be disabled through the radio terminal’s firmware.

Scan Ahead

Scan ahead stores one bar code after the Input Inhibited annunciator appears, and saves it for the next input field.

The Input Inhibited annunciator appears on the status line while waiting for the host to respond.

Key Repeat

Key repeat on the radio terminal’s keyboard is similar to the key repeat on a 5291 Display Station. For example, to fill an input field with the letter “a,” do one of the following:

Press the “A” key repeatedly until the field is full.

Press and hold the “A” key until the field is full.

Key repeat does not work with all keys. Table 4-8 shows which keys do and do not repeat.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 4-21

SECTION 4

RT1700 Radio Terminal

Table 4-8

RT1700 Key Repeat

Repeating

Del

EBCDIC characters

Forward Tab

New Line

Reverse Tab

Cursor control keys used with

[BLACK] and [GOLD]

Nonrepeating

Attn

Backlight

Black Shift

Clear

Dup

Enter/Rec Adv

Erase Input

Error Reset

F1--F24

Field Exit

Field--

Field+

Gold Shift

Help

Hex

Home

Insert

Roll - (Roll up/Page down)

Roll ¯ (Roll down/Page up)

Shift

Shift Lock

Sys Req

4-22 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 4

RT1700 Radio Terminal

System Messages

System codes can also appear on the status line. System messages and codes are described in Section 8, “Display

Data Stream.”

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 4-23

SECTION 4

RT1700 Radio Terminal

4-24 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

Section 5 RT5900 Radio Terminal

" " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " "

Overview

" NOTE:

The RT5900 Mobile Mount Radio Terminal is designed to appear to the host computer as an IBM 5291 Display Station. To help the system programmer design interfaces to the radio terminal, this section describes the screen size, screen modes, annunciators, keyboard, and IBM display emulation for the radio terminal as part of the 5250 data stream.

Radio terminals in the RT5900 Series have UHF, 900 MHz, or WLIF radios.

RT5900 Radio Terminals are compatible with RT3210 (UHF radio only), RT1100, and RT1700 Radio Terminals; and

PEN*KEY R 6400 Computers (900 MHz and WLIF only).

This lets the RT5900 Radio Terminal work interchangeably with other wireless stations on a network.

You can set up the radio terminal through its firmware menus or from the host through the Set Parameters extended command. Extended commands are described in

Section 9. For information about firmware menus, refer to the radio terminal’s user guide.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 5-1

SECTION 5

RT5900 Radio Terminal

Screen Size

The RT5900 Radio Terminal has a 2.5 by 9 inch, supertwist, liquid crystal display with 480 by 128 pixels. It can display

8, 10, 12, 16, or 25 lines and 40, 60, or 80 characters per line. You can set the screen size through the radio terminal’s firmware menus.

The display shows radio terminal and host computer prompts, as well as data entered by the operator. Because a

5291 Display Station has a screen size of 80 characters by

24 lines, the radio terminal presents a part of the information on the larger display station.

The RT5900 Radio Terminal is compatible with RT3210

Radio Terminals (UHF radio only), RT1100 Radio Terminals, and RT1700 Radio Terminals. This lets the RT5900

Radio Terminal work interchangeably with other radio terminals on a network. You do not need to modify your application program. The RT5900 Radio Terminal changes only its display for larger characters.

Screen Modes

The radio terminal has these screen modes: center cursor, corner, page, lazy, and locked. The modes present a window onto a standard IBM 5291 Display Station’s 80-character by

24-line display buffer. You can set the type of screen mode through the radio terminal’s firmware menus.

The screen modes govern which portion of the larger 5291

Display Station’s screen the radio terminal first presents and how the window moves as the cursor moves.

5-2 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 5

RT5900 Radio Terminal

Center Cursor Mode

Corner Mode

Corner mode begins with the window in the upper left corner of the larger IBM 5291 Display Station. It keeps the cursor in the lower right corner of the display. Corner mode works best for applications that use the upper left corner of the logical screen.

As the cursor moves off the right or bottom edge of the radio terminal’s display, the window moves to show the cursor.

When you use corner mode with the brown-colored key, you can move the cursor a predetermined number of key presses in all four directions.

Page Mode

Page mode provides predefined pages within the larger IBM

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 5-3

SECTION 5

RT5900 Radio Terminal

Lazy Mode

Locked Mode

Annunciators

The RT5900 Radio Terminal’s display reserves a location for icons or small pictures, called “annunciators,” which show the radio terminal’s current status or operation in progress.

You can change an annunciator’s location in the display through the radio terminal’s firmware menus, or set the firmware so that the annunciators do not appear. Refer to the radio terminal’s user guide for more information.

The following annunciators can appear in the radio terminal’s display.

5-4 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 5

RT5900 Radio Terminal

The radio terminal is transmitting information to the base radio.

The radio terminal is receiving information from the base radio.

Communication loss. The radio terminal cannot communicate with the host computer. The radio terminal may be out of radio range, the base radio may not have power, or communication from the host to the base radio may not be properly set up.

The radio terminal’s keyboard is in shift mode. The letter key you press while the keyboard is in this mode types the letter in uppercase.

The radio terminal’s keyboard is in brown shift mode. The key you press while the keyboard is in this mode does the operation printed in brown on the overlay and to the upper left of the key.

" The radio terminal’s keyboard is in gold shift mode. The key you press while the keyboard is in this mode types the special character or does the operation printed in gold on the overlay and to the upper right of the key.

X Input inhibited. The keyboard has accepted enough information for the defined input field. The

“key ahead” feature stores keystrokes after this annunciator appears. These are saved for the next field.

Insert mode. The keyboard inserts characters instead of overwriting them.

Message waiting. The host has a message waiting for the radio terminal operator.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 5-5

SECTION 5

RT5900 Radio Terminal

Keyboard

The radio terminal’s 47-key keyboard (Figure 5-1) has shift keys, alphabetic keys, numeric keys, special characters, special function keys, and keys that do other operations.

5-6 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 5

RT5900 Radio Terminal

E X I T

I E L D R E S E T H I F T

Figure 5-1

RT5900 Keyboard

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 5-7

SECTION 5

RT5900 Radio Terminal

Shift Keys

Use the shift keys to type uppercase letters and special characters, and to do special functions. Shift keys are described in the following chart.

Shift Key

[SHIFT]

[BROWN]

[GOLD]

Description

Press [SHIFT] plus a letter to type the letter in uppercase.

The brown-colored key puts the keyboard into brown shift mode. Press the [BROWN] key plus a keyboard key to do an operation printed in brown on the overlay.

The gold-colored key puts the keyboard into gold shift mode. Press the [GOLD] key plus a keyboard key to type a special character or do an operation printed in gold on the overlay.

The special characters and functions printed on the overlay are color-coded to correspond with the shift keys. For example:

To type the special character “@” (printed in brown on the overlay), press [BROWN]+[A].

Press [BROWN]+[F1] to do the [F9] function (printed in brown on the overlay).

Press [GOLD]+[F1] to do the [F17] function (printed in gold on the overlay).

When you press [SHIFT], [BROWN], or [GOLD], an annunciator in the display indicates the current shift mode.

Three of the keys on the keyboard — [FIELD EXIT], [RE-

SET], and [SHIFT] — have their operations printed to the right of them. The operations printed to the right are the

unshifted values. The operations printed above [RESET] and [SHIFT] are the shifted values. [FIELD EXIT] does not have a shifted value.

5-8 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 5

RT5900 Radio Terminal

Alphabetic Keys

Press a letter without first pressing [SHIFT] to type a lowercase letter. Press [SHIFT] plus a letter to type the letter in uppercase. For example, [SHIFT]+[A] types a capital

“A.”

To lock the keyboard into shift mode, press

[BROWN]+[SHIFT]. To unlock the keyboard, press

[BROWN]+[SHIFT] again. The annunciator of a triangle pointing up means the keyboard is in shift mode.

Numeric Keys

Ten numeric keys are arranged in a 10-key format on the right side of the keyboard. Use them to enter numeric data.

Special Characters

Table 5-1 describes how to type special characters.

Table 5-1

RT5900 Special Characters

Special Character

@ (at)

-- (minus)

+ (plus)

( (left parenthesis)

$ (dollar)

) (right parenthesis)

Press

[GOLD]+[A]

[GOLD]+[B]

[GOLD]+[C]

[GOLD]+[D]

[GOLD]+[E]

[GOLD]+[F]

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 5-9

SECTION 5

RT5900 Radio Terminal

Table 5-1 (Continued)

RT5900 Special Characters

Special Character

# (pound)

* (asterisk)

% (percent)

/ (forward slash)

& (ampersand)

; (semicolon)

, (comma)

: (colon)

? (question mark)

_ (underscore)

{ (left brace)

} (right brace)

’ (single quote)

” (double quote)

\ (backslash)

= (equal)

< (left angle bracket)

> (right angle bracket)

~ (tilde)

| (vertical bar)

(not symbol)

¢ (cent)

! (exclamation mark)

| (piping symbol)

‘ (grave accent)

Press

[GOLD]+[G]

[GOLD]+[H]

[GOLD]+[I]

[GOLD]+[J]

[GOLD]+[K]

[GOLD]+[L]

[GOLD]+[M]

[GOLD]+[N]

[GOLD]+[O]

[GOLD]+[P]

[GOLD]+[Q]

[GOLD]+[R]

[GOLD]+[S]

[GOLD]+[T]

[GOLD]+[U]

[GOLD]+[V]

[GOLD]+[W]

[GOLD]+[X]

[GOLD]+[Y]

[GOLD]+[Z]

[GOLD]+[ . ]

[GOLD]+[--]

[GOLD]+[1]

[GOLD]+[2]

[GOLD]+[3]

5-10 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 5

RT5900 Radio Terminal

Special Function Keys

Special function keys are:

AID-generating keys

Cursor movement keys

Field Exit key

Signal keys

Special control keys

Special host keys

The following pages describe special function keys on the

RT5900 Radio Terminal. For complete descriptions, refer to the appropriate IBM 5250 functions reference manual.

AID-Generating Keys

AID-generating keys generate AID codes that go in the display data stream to the host system. They alert the host system that the controller requires some action.

The RT5900 Radio Terminal emulates all of the AID-generating keys on a 5291 Display Station. Table 5-2 lists key sequences.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 5-11

SECTION 5

RT5900 Radio Terminal

Table 5-2

RT5900 AID-Generating Keys

5291 AID Key

Clear

Press

[BROWN]+[7]

Description

The system environment determines the results of this key. If the radio terminal is in session, it issues the

AID code hex BD, which requests that the host system issue a Clear

Unit command to the RT5900 to clear the display. If not in session,

[CLEAR] clears the entire display regeneration buffer.

Enter/Rec Adv

F1--F8

F9--F16

F17--F24

Record Backspace

(Home)

Roll - (Roll up/

Page down)

Roll ¯ (Roll down/

Page up)

[ENTER]

Help (nonerror state) [BROWN]+[8]

[F1]--[F8]

[BROWN]+[F1] --

[BROWN]+[F8]

Enters information.

Issues a hex F3 AID byte to the host system.

User-defined command functions.

[GOLD]+[F1] --

[GOLD]+[F8]

[BROWN]+[2]

User-defined command functions.

[BROWN]+[RESET] When pressed with the cursor in the home position, a record backspace is requested. The AID code hex F8 and cursor address are sent to the host system.

[B]

Tells the controller that the operator wants to print the contents of the present display. Issues hex F6 to the host system.

[Y]

Rolls display down one page; issues

AID code hex F5.

Rolls display up one page; issues

AID code hex F4.

5-12 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 5

RT5900 Radio Terminal

Cursor Movement Keys

The four cursor control keys in the upper-right center of the keyboard move the cursor within the screen buffer. Each key moves the cursor in the direction indicated by the arrow.

INDOW DISPL

S THE TERMI

TO VIEW ANY

E ACTUAL 52

O MOVE ABOU

THE WINDOW DISPLAY MODE

ALLOWS THE TERMINAL

USER TO VIEW ANY PART

OF THE ACTUAL 5291 SCREEN

AND TO MOVE ABOUT THE

5291 SCREEN USING THE

CURSOR CONTROL KEY.

RT5900 Radio Terminal

Figure 5-2

RT5900 Windowing Mode

5291 Display Station

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 5-13

SECTION 5

RT5900 Radio Terminal

Cursor location is not limited to the current window. All cursor movement keys (for example, Field Exit, New Line, and the arrow keys) respond just as they would on the

80x24 display. For example, when you press the [FIELD+] key and the next field is outside the current window, the window moves to the new location.

Use the cursor control keys in combination with [BROWN] and [GOLD] to move through the radio terminal’s display a single space at a time or eight spaces at a time. The following chart shows key combinations.

Forward tab

Reverse tab

Move 8 spaces right

Move 8 spaces left

Move 8 spaces up

Move 8 spaces down

Move 1 position right

Move 1 position left

Move 1 position up

Move 1 position down

Press

["]

[A]

[GOLD]+["]

[GOLD]+[A]

[GOLD]+[Y]

[GOLD]+[B]

[BROWN]+["]

[BROWN]+[A]

[BROWN]+[Y]

[BROWN]+[B]

Field Exit Key

Field Exit clears to the end of the field and tabs to the next field. The key on the RT5900 keyboard is [FIELD EXIT], which is to the left of the cursor control keys.

5-14 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 5

RT5900 Radio Terminal

Signal Keys

Signal keys cause a Signal command to go from the controller to the host system. Signal keys are Attn and Help

(Table 5-3).

Table 5-3

RT5900 Signal Keys

5291 Signal

Key

Attn

Help (from error state)

Press Description

[BROWN]+[9] The operator presses this key to alert the host system that the function requested (for example, [ENTER]) is not being honored. Attn is valid when the keyboard is locked or unlocked. It does not change the keyboard state or the cursor location.

[BROWN]+[8] The operator uses this key to request that the host system send data about the error to the display.

Special Control Keys

Use the special control keys (Table 5-4) to change operatorgenerated information in the radio terminal’s display. The keys do not work when the keyboard is locked.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 5-15

SECTION 5

RT5900 Radio Terminal

5291 Special

Control Key

Del

Display mode

Erase Input

Error Reset

Hex

Home

Insert

Shift Lock

Alternate cursor

Display cursor location

Table 5-4

RT5900 Special Control Keys

Press

[BROWN]+[

(None)

¬ ]

[BROWN]+[4]

Description

Deletes the character in the position where the cursor was located. All remaining characters in the field shift to the left to fill the column.

You must set the radio terminal’s display contrast through the firmware menus.

Clears all fields to nulls, and the cursor moves to the first input field.

[RESET]

[BROWN]+[Z]

Restores the original data on the error line of the display and resets the state.

Enters hexadecimal codes from the keyboard to generate any EBCDIC characters needed for input or display.

[BROWN]+[INSERT] Moves the cursor to the position specified by the insert cursor (IC) address.

[BROWN]+[5] Sets or turns off the insert mode for the input field the operator has the cursor in. The operator must reset the insert state before exiting it, by either pressing [RESET] or

[INSERT] again.

[BROWN]+[SHIFT] Puts the keyboard into shift lock mode.

(None)

You must change the cursor type through the firmware menus.

The radio terminal does not support this feature. On the 5291 keyboard, it displays the cursor location.

5-16 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 5

RT5900 Radio Terminal

Special Host Keys

Special host keys are Sys Req and Test Request (Table 5-5).

Table 5-5

RT5900 Special Host Keys

5291 Special

Host Key

Sys Req

Press Description

[BROWN]+[1] Data on the error line is saved, the error line is cleared, a column separator and underscore field attribute are supplied to column 1 of the error line, and the cursor is located under column 2 to begin polling keystrokes.

Test Request (None) The radio terminal does not support Test Request.

Other Keys

Table 5-6 lists other radio terminal keys and their operations.

Operation

Backspace

Table 5-6

Other RT5900 Keys and Operations

Press

[ ¬ ]

[BROWN]+

[SPACE]

Description

Moves cursor one space to the left.

Brings up the radio terminal’s main menu and firmware parameters.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 5-17

SECTION 5

RT5900 Radio Terminal

(New Line)

Field--

Field+

Table 5-6 (Continued)

Other RT5900 Keys and Operations

Operation

Alternate character size

Dup (duplicate enabled fields only)

Press

[YELLOW]+

[SPACE]

Description

Switches to the alternate character size.

[BROWN]+[0] Controller repeats hex

“1C” from the cursor position to the end of the field. This shows in the display as an overstruck asterisk.

[BROWN]+[Y] Moves cursor to beginning of next line.

[BROWN]+[3] For numeric fields, makes the input a negative number.

[BROWN]+[6] Advances cursor to the next input field. For numeric fields, makes the input a positive number.

You can also use the keyboard to do key ahead, scan ahead, and repeat key operations.

Key Ahead

5-18 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 5

RT5900 Radio Terminal

Scan Ahead

Scan ahead stores one bar code after the Input Inhibited annunciator appears, and saves it for the next input field.

The Input Inhibited annunciator appears on the status line while waiting for the host to respond.

Key Repeat

Key repeat on the radio terminal’s keyboard is similar to the key repeat on a 5291 Display Station. For example, to fill an input field with the letter “a,” do one of the following:

Press the “A” key repeatedly until the field is full.

Press and hold the “A” key until the field is full.

Key repeat does not work with all keys. Table 5-7 shows which keys do and do not repeat.

Table 5-7

RT5900 Key Repeat

Repeating

Del

EBCDIC characters

Forward Tab

New Line

Reverse Tab

Cursor control keys used with [BROWN] and [GOLD]

Nonrepeating

Attn

Brown Shift

Clear

Dup

Enter/Rec Adv

Erase Input

Error Reset

F1--F24

Field Exit

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 5-19

SECTION 5

RT5900 Radio Terminal

Repeating

Table 5-7 (Continued)

RT5900 Key Repeat

Nonrepeating

Field--

Field+

Gold Shift

Help

Hex

Home

Insert

Roll - (Roll up/Page down)

Roll ¯ (Roll down/Page up)

Shift

Shift Lock

Sys Req

System Messages

System codes can also appear on the status line. System messages and codes are described in Section 8, “Display

Data Stream.”

5-20 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

Section 6 ***PEN*KEY***

6400 Computer

" " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " "

Overview

" NOTE:

The PEN*KEY 6400 Computer appears to the host computer as an IBM 5291 Display Station. To help you design interfaces to the PEN*KEY 6400, this section describes the screen size, screen modes, annunciators, keyboards, and

IBM display emulation for the PEN*KEY 6400 as part of the 5250 data stream.

PEN*KEY 6400 Computers have 900 MHz or WLIF radios.

The PEN*KEY computer is compatible with RT1100,

RT1700, and RT5900 Radio Terminals (900 MHz and WLIF radios only). This lets the PEN*KEY computer work interchangeably with other wireless stations on a network.

You can set up the PEN*KEY computer through its firmware menus or from the host through the Set Parameters extended command. Extended commands are described in

Section 9. For more information about firmware menus, refer to the PEN*KEY computer’s user guide.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 6-1

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

Screen Size

You can select the number of display lines and characters per line. The options are 3, 6, 9, or 18 lines by 10, 13, 16,

20, 26, or 32 characters per line. To set the screen size open the firmware and select the following options in this order:

LCD PARMS, SCREEN SIZE.

The display shows PEN*KEY computer and host computer prompts, as well as data entered by the operator. Because a

5291 Display Station has a screen size of 80 characters by

24 lines, the PEN*KEY computer presents a part of the information on the larger display station.

Screen Modes

The PEN*KEY computer has these screen modes: center cursor, corner, page, lazy, and locked. The modes present a window onto a standard 5291 Display Station’s 80-character by 24-line display buffer. You can set the type of screen mode through the PEN*KEY computer’s firmware menus.

The screen modes govern which portion of the larger 5291

Display Station’s screen the PEN*KEY computer first presents and how the window moves as the cursor moves.

Center Cursor Mode

As the cursor moves within the window, the PEN*KEY computer’s display window moves to keep it centered. When the cursor moves off the right, left, top, or bottom edge of the larger 80x24 display, the window remains fixed despite the cursor’s movement.

6-2 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

Corner Mode

As the cursor moves off the right or bottom edge of the

PEN*KEY computer’s display, the window moves to show the cursor. When you use corner mode with the gold-colored key, you can move the cursor a predetermined number of key presses in all four directions.

Page Mode

Page mode provides predefined pages within the larger

5291 Display Station. The size of these pages depends on the number of rows and columns selected for display. The

PEN*KEY computer moves the window by a multiple of the page size. As the cursor moves off the edge of the

PEN*KEY computer’s display, the window changes to the next page.

Lazy Mode

Lazy mode starts the cursor in the upper left corner of the display. The cursor moves across the display in the scrolled direction. When the cursor goes beyond the edge of the display, the data begins to move in the scrolled direction and the cursor remains at the edge of the display. When you try to move the cursor beyond an outside boundary, an error tone sounds.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 6-3

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

Locked Mode

Annunciators

The PEN*KEY computer’s display reserves a location for icons or small pictures, called “annunciators,” which show the PEN*KEY computer’s current status or operation in progress. You can change an annunciator’s location in the display through the PEN*KEY computer’s firmware menus.

Refer to the PEN*KEY computer user’s guide for more information about annunciators.

The PEN*KEY computer is in green shift mode.

The key you press while the computer is in this mode does the function or operation printed in green on the overlay.

The PEN*KEY computer is in gold shift mode. The key you press while the computer is in this mode sends the character or does the operation printed in gold on the overlay.

The PEN*KEY computer is in blue shift mode. The key you press while the computer is in this mode sends the character or does the operation printed in blue on the overlay.

6-4 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

X Input inhibited. The keyboard has accepted enough information for the defined input field. The •key ahead" feature stores keystrokes after this annunciator appears.

These are saved for the next field.

Insert mode. The keyboard inserts characters instead of overwriting them.

Battery capacity. These symbols show the amount of power left in the main battery pack. When all four symbols appear, the battery has more than 75 percent of full capacity. As the battery power decreases to between 50--75 percent capacity, the number of battery icons decreases to three. When the battery pack has between 25--50 percent capacity, two symbols appear. And when the batty pack has less than 25 percent capacity, one symbol appears.

Keyboard

The PEN*KEY computer has either a 41-key keyboard or a standard 51-key keyboard.

51-Key Keyboard

The 51-key keyboard (Figure 6-1) has shift keys, alphabetic keys, numeric keys, special characters, special function keys, and keys that do other operations.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 6-5

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

41-Key Keyboard

The 41-key keyboard (Figure 6-2) has standard numeric keys, an [ENTER] key, and user-defined function keys in its primary plane. It has alphabetic keys in its secondary plane.

Because a PEN*KEY computer with a 41-key keyboard does not have alphabetic keys, follow these procedures to change passwords and cold-start the computer:

To enter the password for the Set-up Parms firmware menu, press [SHFT]+[BLUE]+[3] (a “C”) and then

[SHFT]+[BLUE]+ [F8] (an “R”). Then press the correct numbers, which are 52401.

To initiate the COLD START? menu option, press

[BLUE]+ [F11]+[RST] to answer “yes.”

6-6 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

Figure 6-1

PEN*KEY 6400 51-Key Keyboard

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 6-7

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

Figure 6-2

PEN*KEY 6400 41-Key Keyboard

6-8 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

Shift Keys

Use the shift keys on the 51- and 41-key keyboards to type uppercase letters and special characters, and to do special functions. Shift keys are described in the following chart.

Shift Key

[SHFT]

[GOLD]

[BLUE]

Description

Press the green [SHFT] key plus a letter to type the letter in uppercase.

The gold-colored key puts the keyboard into gold shift mode. Press [GOLD] plus a keyboard key to type a character or do an operation printed in gold on the overlay.

The blue-colored key puts the keyboard into blue shift mode. Press [BLUE] plus a keyboard key to do an operation printed in blue on the overlay.

The special characters and functions printed on the overlay are color-coded to correspond with the shift keys. For example:

On the 51-key keyboard, to type the special character

“@” (printed in gold on the overlay), press [GOLD]+[E].

On the 51-key keyboard, press [BLUE]+[M] to do the

F13 function (printed in blue on the overlay).

On the 41-key keyboard, press [SHFT]+[F1] to do the

F13 function (printed in green on the overlay).

The 51-key keyboard has two white, unlabeled keys in the bottom row of the keyboard. Following are the keys’ functions when they are unshifted (in the primary plane):

The key with “FLDX” printed above it is the Field Exit key.

The key with “SP” printed above it is the Space key.

The 41-key keyboard has four white, unlabeled keys near the bottom row of the keyboard. Following are the key’s functions when they are primary plane:

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 6-9

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

The key with “DUP” printed above it is the Duplicate key.

The key with “ATN” printed above it is the Attention key.

The key with “RST” printed above it is the Error Reset key.

The key with “FLDX” printed above it is the Field Exit key.

Alphabetic Keys

51-Key Keyboard

Table 6-1 shows how to type letters on the 51-key keyboard.

To put the keyboard into shift lock (caps lock) mode, press

[BLUE]+[SHFT]. The keyboard stays in shift lock mode until you press [BLUE]+[SHFT] again to unlock it.

To Type a--y z

A--Y

Table 6-1

PEN*KEY 6400 Letters, 51-Key Keyboard

Press

[A] -- [Y]

[BLUE]+[SP]

[SHFT]+[A] -- [SHFT] + [Y]

[SHFT]+[BLUE]+[SP]

41-Key Keyboard

You can use one of two methods to type letters on the

41-key keyboard: standard blue shift mode or alpha lock mode. When engaged, alpha lock switches the alphabetic keys with the function keys.

6-10 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

" NOTE:

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

That is, it moves lowercase alphabetic keys from their standard [BLUE] plane to the primary plane. It moves uppercase alphabetic keys from their standard [SHFT]+[BLUE] plane to the [SHFT] plane. Alpha lock provides a faster way to type a series of letters because it reduces the number of key presses.

Alpha lock mode moves only lowercase alphabetic keys to the primary plane.

Table 6-2 describes how to type letters on the 41-key keyboard in standard blue shift mode and alpha lock mode. To engage alpha lock mode press [BLUE]+[GOLD]. Then, to type a series of letters, press the correct key combinations listed in the table. The keyboard stays in alpha lock mode until you press [BLUE]+[GOLD] to unlock it.

Table 6-2

PEN*KEY 6400 Letters, 41-Key Keyboard y z w x

To Type Standard Mode a--i [BLUE]+[1] --

[BLUE]+[9] j k--v

[BLUE]+[0]

[BLUE]+[F1] --

[BLUE]+[F12]

[BLUE]+[DUP]

[BLUE]+[ATN]

[BLUE]+[RST]

[BLUE]+[FLDX]

Alpha Lock Mode

[1] -- [9]

[0]

[F1] -- [F12]

[DUP]

[ATN]

[RST]

[FLDX]

A--I

K--V

[SHFT]+[BLUE]+[1] --

[SHFT]+[BLUE]+[9]

[SHFT]+[BLUE]+[0]

[SHFT]+[BLUE]+[F1] --

[SHFT]+[BLUE]+[F12]

[SHFT]+[1] --

[SHFT]+[9]

[SHFT]+[0]

[SHFT]+[F1] --

[SHFT]+[F12]

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 6-11

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

To Type

Table 6-2 (Continued)

PEN*KEY 6400 Letters, 41-Key Keyboard

Standard Mode Alpha Lock Mode

[SHFT]+[BLUE]+[DUP] [SHFT]+[DUP]

[SHFT]+[BLUE]+[ATN] [SHFT]+[ATN]

[SHFT]+[BLUE]+[RST] [SHFT]+[RST]

[SHFT]+[BLUE]+[FLDX] [SHFT]+[FLDX]

Numeric Keys

Numeric keys are arranged in a 10-key format in the middle section of the 51- and 41-key keyboards. Use the numbers to enter numeric data.

Special Characters

Table 6-3 describes how to type special characters on the

51-key keyboard, and the 41-key keyboard when not in alpha lock mode.

Table 6-3

PEN*KEY 6400 Special Characters

Special Character

* (asterisk)

/ (forward slash)

\ (backslash)

51-Key

[GOLD]+[A]

[GOLD]+[B]

[GOLD]+[C]

| (vertical bar)

@ (at)

( (left parenthesis)

{ (left brace)

[GOLD]+[D]

[GOLD]+[E]

[GOLD]+[F]

[GOLD]+[G]

< (left angle bracket) [GOLD]+[H]

41-Key

[GOLD]+[F1]

[GOLD]+[F2]

[GOLD]+[F3]

[SHFT]+[7]

[GOLD]+[F4]

[GOLD]+[F5]

[GOLD]+[F6]

[GOLD]+[F7]

6-12 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

Table 6-3 (Continued)

PEN*KEY 6400 Special Characters

Special Character

= (equal)

51-Key

[GOLD]+[I]

+ (plus) [GOLD]+[J]

) (right parenthesis) [GOLD]+[K]

} (right brace) [GOLD]+[L]

> (right angle bracket) [GOLD]+[M]

! (exclamation mark) [GOLD]+[N]

$ (dollar) [GOLD]+[O]

# (pound)

% (percent)

& (ampersand)

; (semicolon)

, (comma)

: (colon)

? (question mark)

_ (underscore)

’ (left single quote)

| (piping symbol)

‘ (grave accent)

¢ (cent)

(not symbol)

~ (tilde)

[GOLD]+[P]

[GOLD]+[Q]

[GOLD]+[R]

[GOLD]+[S]

[GOLD]+[T]

[GOLD]+[U]

[GOLD]+[V]

[GOLD]+[W]

[GOLD]+[X]

[GOLD]+[Y]

41-Key

[GOLD]+[12]

[GOLD]+[F8]

[GOLD]+[F9]

[GOLD]+[F10]

[GOLD]+[F11]

[SHFT]+[6]

[GOLD]+[RST]

[GOLD]+[0]

[GOLD]+[ATN]

[GOLD]+[DUP]

[SHFT]+[5]

[SHFT]+[9]

[SHFT]+[4]

[GOLD]+[FLDX]

Not applicable

[GOLD]+[SP]

[GOLD]+[Y]

[GOLD]+[FLDX] [BLUE]+[SP]

[GOLD]+[7] [BLUE]+[ -- ]

[GOLD]+[6] [BLUE]+[ . ]

[BLUE]+[FLDX] [SHFT]+[1]

” (double quote) [BLUE]+[Y] [SHFT]+[SP]

You can type some special characters when the 41-key keyboard is in alpha lock mode. (Press [BLUE]+[GOLD] to put the keyboard into alpha lock mode.) Table 6-4 shows how to type the characters when the keyboard is in alpha lock mode.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 6-13

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

Table 6-4

PEN*KEY 6400 Special Characters, Alpha Lock Mode

Special Character

~ (tilde)

-- (hyphen)

: (colon)

41-Key Keyboard

[SHFT]+[BLUE]+[1]

[SHFT]+[BLUE]+[3]

[SHFT]+[BLUE]+[4]

; (semicolon) [SHFT]+[BLUE]+[5]

! (exclamation mark) [SHFT]+[BLUE]+[6]

| (vertical bar)

| (piping symbol)

, (comma)

[SHFT]+[BLUE]+[7]

[SHFT]+[BLUE]+[8]

[SHFT]+[BLUE]+[9]

Special Function Keys

Special function keys are:

AID-generating keys

Cursor movement keys

Field Exit key

Signal keys

Special control keys

Special host keys

The following pages briefly describe the special function keys on the PEN*KEY computer. For complete descriptions, refer to the appropriate IBM 5250 functions reference manual.

6-14 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

5291 AID Key

F1--F12

F13--F24

Enter/Rec Adv

Help

(nonerror state)

Clear

AID-Generating Keys

AID-generating keys generate AID codes that go in the display data stream to the host system. They alert the host system that the controller requires some action. Table 6-5 shows key combinations for the 51-key keyboard, and the

41-key keyboard when not in alpha lock mode.

Table 6-5

PEN*KEY 6400 AID-Generating Keys

51-Key

Keyboard

[BLUE]+[A] --

[BLUE]+[L]

[BLUE]+[M] --

[BLUE]+[X]

[ENTER]

[BLUE]+[7]

41-Key

Keyboard

[F1] -- [F12]

[SHFT]+[F1] --

[SHFT]+[F12]

[ENTER]

[GOLD]+[4]

Description

User-defined function.

[BLUE]+[4]

[BLUE]+[6]

[GOLD]+[3]

[GOLD]+[ ¬ ]

Enters information.

Issues a hex F3 AID byte to the host system.

Tells the controller that the operator wants to print the contents of the present display. Issues hex F6 to the host system.

The system environment determines the results of this key. If the PEN*KEY computer is in session, it issues the AID code hex

BD, which requests that the host system issue a

Clear Unit command to the computer to clear the display. If not in session,

[CLEAR] clears the entire display regeneration buffer.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 6-15

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

5291 AID Key

Record

Backspace

(Home)

Roll - (Roll up/

Page down)

Roll ¯ (Roll down/

Page up)

Table 6-5 (Continued)

PEN*KEY 6400 AID-Generating Keys

51-Key

Keyboard

[GOLD]+[3]

[GOLD]+[Y]

[GOLD]+[B]

41-Key

Keyboard

[GOLD]+[7]

[GOLD]+[Y]

[GOLD]+[B]

Description

When pressed with the cursor in the home position, a record backspace is requested. The AID code hex F8 and cursor address are sent to the host system.

Rolls display down one page; issues AID code hex

F5.

Rolls display up one page; issues AID code hex F4.

When alpha lock mode is engaged on the 41-key keyboard, it switches the function keys with the alphabetic keys.

That is, function keys normally in the primary plane ([F1] through [F12]) move to the [BLUE] plane. Function keys normally in the [SHFT] plane ([F13] through [F24]) move to the [SHFT]+[BLUE] plane. Table 6-6 describes how to do function operations when the 41-key keyboard is in alpha lock mode.

Table 6-6

PEN*KEY 6400 Function Keys, Alpha Lock Mode

Function

F1-F12

F13-F24

Press

[BLUE]+[F1] - [BLUE]+[F12]

[SHFT]+[BLUE]+[F1] - [SHFT]+[BLUE]+[F12]

6-16 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

Cursor Movement

The four cursor control keys at the top of the keyboard move the cursor within the screen buffer. Each key moves the cursor in the direction indicated by the arrow.

INDOW DISPL

S THE COMPUT

TO VIEW ANY

E ACTUAL 52

O MOVE ABOU

THE WINDOW DISPLAY MODE

ALLOWS THE COMPUTER

USER TO VIEW ANY PART

OF THE ACTUAL 5291 SCREEN

AND TO MOVE ABOUT THE

5291 SCREEN USING THE

CURSOR CONTROL KEY.

PEN*KEY 6400

Computer

5291 Display Station

Figure 6-3

PEN*KEY 6400 Windowing Mode

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 6-17

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

Cursor location is not limited to the current window. All cursor movement keys (for example, Field Exit, New Line, and the cursor keys) respond just as they would on the

80x24 display. For example, when you press the [FIELD+] key and the next field is outside the current window, the window moves to the new location.

Use the cursor control keys in combination with [BLUE] and [GOLD] to move through the PEN*KEY computer’s display a single space at a time or eight spaces at a time. The following chart shows key combinations for the 51- and

41-key keyboards.

Forward tab

Reverse tab

Move 1 space right

Move 1 space left

Move 1 space up

Move 1 space down

Move 8 spaces right

Move 8 spaces left

Move 8 spaces up

Move 8 spaces down

Press

[GOLD]+["]

[GOLD]+[A]

[GOLD]+["]

[GOLD]+[A]

[GOLD]+[Y]

[GOLD]+[B]

[BLUE]+["]

[BLUE]+[A]

[BLUE]+[Y]

[BLUE]+[B]

Field Exit

Field Exit clears to the end of the field and tabs to the next field. The key on the 51- and 41-key keyboards is [FLDX].

6-18 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

Signal Keys

Signal keys cause a Signal command to go from the controller to the host system. Signal keys are Attn and Help.

Table 6-7 shows key combinations.

5291 Signal

Key

Attn

Help (from error state)

Table 6-7

PEN*KEY 6400 Signal Keys

51-Key

Keyboard

41-Key

Keyboard

[BLUE]+[8] [ATN]

Description

The operator presses this key to alert the host system that the function requested (for example,

[ENTER]) is not being honored.

Attn is valid when the keyboard is locked or unlocked. It does not change the keyboard state or the cursor location.

[BLUE]+[7] [GOLD]+[4] The operator uses this key to request that the host system send, to the display, data about the error.

Special Control Keys

Use the special control keys to change operator-generated information in the PEN*KEY computer’s display. The keys do not work when the keyboard is locked. Table 6-8 shows key combinations.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 6-19

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

5291 Special

Control Key

Del

Display Mode

Erase Input

Error Reset

Hex

Home

Insert

Shift Lock

Table 6-8

PEN*KEY 6400 Special Control Keys

51-Key

Keyboard

41-Key

Keyboard

[BLUE]+[

None

¬ ]

[BLUE]+[3]

[GOLD]+[1]

[GOLD]+[4]

[BLUE]+[

None

¬ ]

[GOLD]+[8]

[RST]

[GOLD]+[2]

Description

Deletes the character in the position where the cursor was located. All remaining characters in the field shift to the left to fill the column.

You must set the

PEN*KEY computer’s display contrast through the firmware menus.

Clears all fields to nulls, and the cursor moves to the first input field.

Restores the original data on the error line of the display and resets the state.

Enters hexadecimal codes from the keyboard to generate any EBCDIC characters needed for input or display.

[GOLD]+[3]

[BLUE]+[5]

[GOLD]+[7]

[GOLD]+[9]

Moves the cursor to the position specified by the insert cursor (IC) address.

Sets or turns off the insert mode for the input field the operator has the cursor in. The operator must reset the insert state before exiting it, by either pressing [RESET] or

[Insert] again.

[BLUE]+[SHFT] [BLUE]+[SHFT] Puts the keyboard into shift lock mode. Press the sequence again to unlock.

6-20 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

Table 6-8 (Continued)

PEN*KEY 6400 Special Control Keys

5291 Special

Control Key

51-Key

Keyboard

Alternate cursor (None)

41-Key

Keyboard

(None)

Display cursor location

(None) (None)

Description

You must change the cursor type through the firmware menus.

The PEN*KEY computer does not support this feature. On the 5291 keyboard, it displays the cursor location.

Special Host Keys

Special host keys are Sys Req and Test Request. Table 6-9 shows key combinations.

5291 Special

Host Key

Sys Req

Table 6-9

PEN*KEY 6400 Special Host Keys

51Key

Keyboard

41Key

Keyboard Description

[BLUE]+[1] [GOLD]+[1] Data on the error line is saved, the error line is cleared, an underscore field attribute is supplied to column

1 of the error line, and the cursor is located under column 2 to begin polling keystrokes.

Test Request (None) (None) The PEN*KEY computer does not support Test Request.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 6-21

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

Other Keys

Table 6-10 lists other PEN*KEY computer keys and their operations.

Operation

Backspace

Field--

Field+

Backlight

Table 6-10

Other PEN*KEY 6400 Keys and Operations

51-Key

Keyboard

[ ¬ ]

[GOLD]+

[BLUE]

Dup (duplicate enabled fields only)

[BLUE]+[9]

(New Line) [GOLD]+[5]

[GOLD]+[9]

[GOLD]+[8]

[SHFT]+[Y]

41-Key

Keyboard

[ ¬ ]

[GOLD]+

[BLUE]

[DUP ]

[SHFT]+[0]

[GOLD]+[6]

[GOLD]+[5]

[SHFT]+[Y]

Description

Moves cursor one space to the left.

Brings up the PEN*KEY computer’s main menu and firmware parameters.

Controller repeats hex 1C from the cursor position to the end of the field. This shows in the display as an overstruck asterisk.

Moves cursor to beginning of next field.

For numeric fields, makes the input a negative number.

Advances cursor to the next input field. For numeric fields, makes the input a positive number.

Toggles the display’s backlight on and off.

You can also use the keyboard to do key ahead, scan ahead, and repeat key operations.

6-22 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

Key Ahead

Key ahead stores keystrokes after the Input Inhibited annunciator appears, and saves them for the next input field.

The Input Inhibited annunciator appears on the status line while the PEN*KEY computer is waiting for the host to respond. Key ahead is enabled as a default but can be disabled through the PEN*KEY computer’s firmware.

Scan Ahead

Scan ahead stores one bar code after the Input Inhibited annunciator appears, and saves it for the next input field.

The Input Inhibited annunciator appears on the status line while waiting for the host to respond.

Key Repeat

Key repeat on the PEN*KEY computer’s keyboard is similar to the key repeat on a 5291 Display Station. For example, to fill an input field with the letter “a,” do one of the following:

Press the “A” key repeatedly until the field is full.

Press and hold the “A” key until the field is full.

Key repeat does not work with all keys. Table 6-11 shows which keys do and do not repeat.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 6-23

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

Table 6-11

PEN*KEY 6400 Key Repeat

Repeating

Del

EBCDIC characters

Forward Tab

New Line

Reverse Tab

Cursor control keys used with

[BLUE] and [GOLD]

Non-repeating

Attn

Backlight

Blue shift

Clear

Dup

Enter/Rec Adv

Erase Input

Error Reset

F1--F24

Field Exit

Field--

Field+

Gold shift

Help

Hex

Home

Insert

Roll - (Roll up/Page down)

Roll ¯ (Roll down/Page up)

Shift

Shift Lock

Sys Req

6-24 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

System Messages

The PEN*KEY computer’s display reserves a line for status information. The status line can display system (nonlocal) information such as a message waiting from the host computer, help messages in response to the [HELP] key, or the system request state of the PEN*KEY computer.

System codes can also appear on the status line. System messages and codes are described in Section 8, “Display

Data Stream.”

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 6-25

SECTION 6

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

6-26 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

Section 7 ***PEN*KEY***

6500 Computer

" " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " "

Overview

" NOTE:

The PEN*KEY 6500 Computer appears to the host computer as an IBM 5291 Display Station. To help you design interfaces to the PEN*KEY 6500, this section describes the screen size, screen modes, annunciators, keyboard, and

IBM display emulation for the PEN*KEY 6500 as part of the 5250 data stream.

PEN*KEY computers in the 6500 Series have WLIF radios only.

The PEN*KEY computer is compatible with RT1100,

RT1700, and RT5900 Radio Terminals, and PEN*KEY 6400

Computers (with WLIF radios only). This lets the

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer work interchangeably with other wireless stations on a network.

You can set up the PEN*KEY computer through its firmware menus or from the host through the Set Parameters extended command. Extended commands are described in

Section 9. For more information about firmware menus, refer to the PEN*KEY computer’s user guide.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 7-1

SECTION 7

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer

Screen Size

You can select the number of display lines and characters per line. The options are 20, 40, or 80 characters per line by 8, 10, 12, 16, 21, or 25 lines. To set the screen size open the firmware and select the following options in this order:

LCD PARMS, SCREEN SIZE.

The display shows PEN*KEY computer and host computer prompts, as well as data entered by the operator. Because a

5291 Display Station has a screen size of 80 characters by

24 lines, the PEN*KEY computer presents a part of the information on the larger display station.

Screen Modes

The PEN*KEY computer has these screen modes: center cursor, corner, page, lazy, and locked. The modes present a window onto a standard IBM 5291 Display Station’s

80-character by 24-line display buffer. You can set the type of screen mode through the PEN*KEY computer’s firmware menus.

The screen modes govern which portion of the larger 5291

Display Station’s screen the PEN*KEY computer first presents and how the window moves as the cursor moves.

Center Cursor Mode

7-2 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 7

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer

As the cursor moves within the window, the PEN*KEY computer’s display window moves to keep it centered. When the cursor moves off the right, left, top, or bottom edge of the 5291 Display Station, the window remains fixed despite the cursor’s movement.

Corner Mode

As the cursor moves off the right or bottom edge of the

PEN*KEY computer’s display, the window moves to show the cursor. When you use corner mode with the brown-colored key, you can move the cursor a predetermined number of key presses in all four directions.

Page Mode

Page mode provides predefined pages within the larger IBM

5291 Display Station. The size of these pages depends on the number of rows and columns selected for display. The

PEN*KEY computer moves the window by a multiple of the page size. As the cursor moves off the edge of the

PEN*KEY computer’s display, the window changes to the next page.

Lazy Mode

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 7-3

SECTION 7

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer

Locked Mode

Annunciators

Refer to the PEN*KEY computer’s user guide for more information about annunciators.

The PEN*KEY computer is in shift mode. The key you press while the computer is in this mode types a letter in uppercase.

The PEN*KEY computer is in gold shift (Alt) mode.

The key you press while the computer is in this mode does the operation printed in gold on the keyboard.

7-4 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 7

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer

The PEN*KEY computer is in blue shift (Ctrl)

mode. The key you press while the computer is in this mode does the operation printed in blue on the keyboard, or sends a control character.

Input inhibited. The keyboard has accepted enough information for the defined input field. The

“key ahead” feature stores keystrokes after this annunciator appears. These are saved for the next field.

Insert mode. The keyboard inserts characters instead of overwriting them.

The PEN*KEY computer is in green shift (number

lock) mode. The key you press while the computer is in this mode types the number or character printed in green on the keyboard.

The PEN*KEY computer is in caps (shift) lock. The key you press while the computer is in this mode types letters in uppercase.

Keyboard

The PEN*KEY computer’s 81-key external keyboard

(Figure 7-1) has shift keys, alphabetic keys, numeric keys, special characters, special function keys, and keys that do other operations. Note that these keys are not supported:

Fn, Setup, Pause, Break, End, and ScrLk.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 7-5

SECTION 7

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer

” ’

? /

Figure 7-1

PEN*KEY 6500 Keyboard

7-6 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 7

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer

Shift Keys

Use the shift keys to type uppercase letters and special characters, and to do special functions. Shift keys are described in the following chart.

Shift Key

[Shift]

[Blue]

[Gold]

[NumLk]

Description

Press [Shift] plus a letter to type the letter in uppercase.

The blue-colored (Ctrl) key puts the keyboard into blue shift [Blue] mode. Press [Blue] plus a keyboard key to do an operation printed in blue, or to send a control character.

The gold-colored (Alt) key puts the keyboard into gold shift [Gold] mode. Press [Gold] plus a keyboard key to do an operation printed in gold.

The green-colored (number lock) key puts the keyboard into [NumLk] mode. Press [NumLk] plus a keyboard key to type a number or character printed in green.

Special characters and functions are color-coded to correspond with the shift keys. For example:

Press [Blue]+[F1] to do the [F11] function (printed in blue on the key).

Press [Gold]+[F1] to do the [F21] function (printed in gold on the key).

When you press [Shift], [Blue], [Gold], or [NumLk], an annunciator in the display indicates the current shift mode.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 7-7

SECTION 7

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer

Alphabetic Keys

Press a letter without first pressing [Shift] to type a lowercase letter. Press [Shift] plus a letter to type the letter in uppercase. For example, [Shift]+[A] types a capital “A.” To lock the keyboard into shift mode, press [Caps Lock]. To unlock the keyboard, press [Caps Lock] again.

Numeric Keys

Ten numeric keys are arranged in a 10-key format near the top of the keyboard. Use them to enter numeric data.

Special Characters

Table 7-1 describes how to type special characters.

Table 7-1

PEN*KEY 6500 Special Characters

Special Character

~ (tilde)

! (exclamation mark)

@ (at)

# (pound)

$ (dollar)

% (percent)

^ (circumflex)

Press

[Shift]+[‘]

[Shift]+[1]

[Shift]+[2]

[Shift]+[3]

[Shift]+[4]

[Shift]+[5]

[Shift]+[6]

7-8 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 7

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer

Table 7-1 (Continued)

PEN*KEY 6500 Special Characters

Special Character

& (ampersand)

Press

[Shift]+[7]

* (asterisk)

( (left parenthesis)

) (right parenthesis)

-- (hyphen)

+ (plus)

{ (left brace)

[Shift]+[8]

[Shift]+[9]

[Shift]+[0]

[--]

[Shift]+[=]

[Shift]+[ key

} (right brace)

| (vertical bar)

: (colon)

“ (double quote)

< (less than)

> (greater than)

? (question mark)

[ (left bracket)

] (right bracket)

\ (backslash)

; (semicolon)

’ (single quote)

, (comma)

. (period)

/ (forward slash)

_ (underscore)

= (equal)

‘ (grave accent)

[Shift]+] key

[Shift]+[\]

[Shift]+[;]

[Shift]+[’]

[Shift]+[,]

[Shift]+[.]

[Shift]+[/]

[ key

] key

[\]

[;]

[’]

[,]

[.]

[/]

[Shift]+[--]

[=]

[‘]

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 7-9

SECTION 7

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer

Special Function Keys

Special function keys are:

AID-generating keys

Cursor movement keys

Field Exit key

Signal keys

Special control keys

Special host keys

The following pages describe special function keys on the

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer. For complete descriptions, refer to the appropriate IBM 5250 functions reference manual.

AID-Generating Keys

AID-generating keys generate AID codes that go in the display data stream to the host system. They alert the host system that the controller requires some action. The

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer emulates all of the AID-generating keys on a 5291 Display Station. Table 7-2 lists key sequences.

7-10 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 7

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer

5291 AID Key

F1--F10

F11--F20

F21--F24

Table 7-2

PEN*KEY 6500 AID-Generating Keys

Press

[F1] -- [F10]

[Blue]+[F1] --

[Blue]+[F10]

[Gold]+[F1] --

[Gold]+[F10]

Enter/Rec Adv [Enter]

Help (nonerror state) [Gold]+[8]

Description

User-defined command functions.

Clear

Record Backspace

(Home)

Roll Down/Page Up

Roll Up/Page Down

[Gold]+[2]

[Gold]+[7]

[Home]

[Roll Dn]

[Roll Up]

Enters information.

Issues a hex F3 AID byte to the host system.

Tells the controller that the operator wants to print the contents of the present display. Issues hex F6 to the host system.

The system environment determines the results of this key. If the PEN*KEY computer is in session, it issues the AID code hex BD, which requests that the host system issue a Clear Unit command to the

PEN*KEY 6500 to clear the display. If not in session, [CLEAR] clears the entire display regeneration buffer.

When pressed with the cursor in the home position, a record backspace is requested.

The AID code hex F8 and cursor address are sent to the host system.

Rolls display down one page; issues AID code hex F5.

Rolls display up one page; issues AID code hex F4.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 7-11

SECTION 7

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer

Cursor Movement

The four cursor control keys in the lower right corner of the keyboard move the cursor within the screen buffer. Each key moves the cursor in the direction indicated by the arrow.

INDOW DISPL

S THE TERMI

TO VIEW ANY

E ACTUAL 52

O MOVE ABOU

THE WINDOW DISPLAY MODE

ALLOWS THE TERMINAL

USER TO VIEW ANY PART

OF THE ACTUAL 5291 SCREEN

AND TO MOVE ABOUT THE

5291 SCREEN USING THE

CURSOR CONTROL KEY.

PEN*KEY 6500

Computer

5291 Display Station

Figure 7-2

PEN*KEY 6500 Windowing Mode

7-12 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 7

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer

Cursor location is not limited to the current window. All cursor movement keys (for example, Field Exit, New Line, and the arrow keys) respond just as they would on the

80x24 display. For example, when you press the [FIELD+] key and the next field is outside the current window, the window moves to the new location.

Use the cursor control keys in combination with [Blue] and

[Gold] to move through the PEN*KEY computer’s display a single space at a time or eight spaces at a time. The following chart shows key combinations.

Press To Move

Forward Tab

Reverse Tab

One position right

One position left

One position up

One position down

Eight positions right

Eight positions left

Eight positions up

Eight positions down

[Blue]+

[Gold]+

Field Exit Key

Field Exit clears to the end of the field and tabs to the next field. The key combination on the PEN*KEY 6500 keyboard is [Gold]+[5].

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 7-13

SECTION 7

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer

Signal Keys

Signal keys cause a Signal command to go from the controller to the host system. Signal keys are Attn and Help

(Table 7-3).

5291 Signal Key

Attn

Press

[Gold]+[9]

Help (from error state)

Table 7-3

PEN*KEY 6500 Signal Keys

[Gold]+[8]

Description

The operator presses this key to alert the host system that the function requested (for example,

[ENTER]) is not being honored.

Attn is valid when the keyboard is locked or unlocked. It does not change the keyboard state or the cursor location.

The operator uses this key to request that the host system send data about the error to the display.

Special Control Keys

Use the special control keys to change operator-generated information in the PEN*KEY computer’s display. The keys do not work when the keyboard is locked. Table 7-4 shows key combinations.

7-14 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 7

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer

Table 7-4

PEN*KEY 6500 Special Control Keys

5291 Special

Control Key

Del

Display mode

Erase Input

Error Reset

Press

[Del]

(None)

Description

Deletes the character in the position where the cursor was located. All remaining characters in the field shift to the left to fill the column.

You must set the PEN*KEY computer’s display contrast through the firmware menus.

[Gold]+[4] Clears all fields to nulls, and the cursor moves to the first input field.

[Reset] Restores the original data on the error line of the display and resets the state.

Hex

Home

Insert

Shift Lock

Alternate cursor

Display cursor location

[Gold]+[Z] Enters hexadecimal codes from the keyboard to generate any

EBCDIC characters needed for input or display.

[Home] Moves the cursor to the position specified by the insert cursor

(IC) address.

[Ins] Sets or turns off the insert mode for the input field the operator has the cursor in. The operator must reset the insert state before exiting it, by either pressing [Reset] or [Ins] again.

[Caps Lock] Puts the keyboard into shift lock mode.

(None) You must change the cursor type through the firmware menus.

(None) The PEN*KEY computer does not support this feature. On the

5291 keyboard, it displays the cursor location.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 7-15

SECTION 7

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer

Special Host Keys

Special host keys are Sys Req and Test Request. Table 7-5 shows key combinations.

5291 Special

Host Key

Sys Req

Press

[Gold]+[1]

Test Request

Table 7-5

PEN*KEY 6500 Special Host Keys

(None)

Description

Data on the error line is saved, the error line is cleared, a column separator and underscore field attribute are supplied to column 1 of the error line, and the cursor is located under column 2 to begin polling keystrokes.

The PEN*KEY computer does not support Test Request.

Other Keys

Table 7-6 lists other PEN*KEY computer keys and their operations.

Operation

Backspace

Table 7-6

Other PEN*KEY 6500 Keys and Operations

Press

[Gold]+[M]

Description

Moves cursor one space to the left.

Brings up the PEN*KEY computer’s main menu and firmware parameters.

7-16 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 7

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer

Dup (duplicate enabled fields only)

Table 7-6 (Continued)

Other PEN*KEY 6500 Keys and Operations

Operation Press

New line (Return) [Gold]+[N]

Field--

Field+

[Gold]+[0]

[Gold]+[3]

[Gold]+[6]

Description

Moves cursor to beginning of next line.

Controller repeats hex

“1C” from the cursor position to the end of the field.

This shows in the display as an overstruck asterisk.

For numeric fields, makes the input a negative number.

Advances cursor to the next input field. For numeric fields, makes the input a positive number.

You can also use the keyboard to do key ahead, scan ahead, and repeat key operations.

Key Ahead

Key ahead stores keystrokes after the Input Inhibited annunciator appears, and saves them for the next input field. The Input Inhibited annunciator appears on the status line while the PEN*KEY computer is waiting for the host to respond. Key ahead is enabled as a default but can be disabled through the PEN*KEY computer’s firmware.

Scan Ahead

Scan ahead stores one bar code after the Input Inhibited annunciator appears, and saves it for the next input field.

The Input Inhibited annunciator appears on the status line while waiting for the host to respond.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 7-17

SECTION 7

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer

Key Repeat

Key repeat on the PEN*KEY computer’s keyboard is similar to the key repeat on a 5291 Display Station. For example, to fill an input field with the letter “a,” do one of the following:

Press the “A” key repeatedly until the field is full.

Press and hold the “A” key until the field is full.

Key repeat does not work with all keys. Table 7-7 shows which keys do and do not repeat.

Table 7-7

PEN*KEY 6500 Key Repeat

Repeating

Del

EBCDIC characters

Forward Tab

New Line ([Return])

Reverse Tab

Cursor control keys used with [Blue] and [Gold]

Nonrepeating

Attn

Blue shift

Caps Lock

Clear

Dup

Enter/Rec Adv

Erase

Reset

F1--F24

Field Exit

Field--

Field+

Gold shift

7-18 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 7

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer

Repeating

Table 7-7 (Continued)

PEN*KEY 6500 Key Repeat

Nonrepeating

Help

Hex

Home

Insert

NumLk

Roll Down/Page Up

Roll Up/Page Down

Shift

Sys Req

System Messages

The PEN*KEY computer’s display reserves a line for status information. The status line can display system (nonlocal) information such as a message waiting from the host computer, help messages in response to the [Help] key, or the system request state of the PEN*KEY computer.

System codes can also appear on the status line. System messages and codes are described in Section 8, “Display

Data Stream.”

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 7-19

SECTION 7

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer

7-20 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

Section 8 Display Data Stream

" " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " "

Overview

This section describes the following:

The host 5250 display data stream commands the host application can send to wireless stations.

The host 5250 data stream orders that the host can send to wireless stations. Orders govern format and data expectations within the Write to Display command.

Asynchronous 5250 prefixes.

System messages and parameter errors that can appear in the wireless station’s display.

This section is not intended as a specific guide for programming, but a comparison with your existing system. The information helps identify differences between your screengenerating utilities and the features supported by the wireless stations.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 8-1

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Screen Design Aid

This section, along with your Screen Design Aid (SDA) documentation, can help you resolve occasional questions concerning discrepancies that may arise regarding attribute selection and the capabilities of the wireless stations. This section includes information you may not need, because you can use your SDA to do much, if not all, of the programming to handle commands and orders for the radio data network.

This information is provided to assure you have the most accurate and detailed information available and to describe variations from the 5250 data stream where they occur.

If you are comfortable using the SDA on your host computer, you can flip through this section to find out which commands and orders the wireless stations support. You can then read Section 9, which describes the extended commands you can use to do operations beyond the capability of the 5291 Display Station.

Applications

If you need to write applications specifically for the wireless station, it is recommended that you use the corner mode window onto the IBM 5291 Display Station and write programs using the portion of the display available without moving the window. This is the most efficient method for developing custom applications for the wireless station.

8-2 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Data Stream Command Structure

The 5250 command structure lets the wireless stations display prompts and accept keyboard or scanner input. A second kind of command, called an order, works with the

Write To Display command to define radio display characteristics, buffer sizes, and acceptable data types.

Display data stream commands form two categories: the input commands and the output commands. Table 8-1 lists input commands and hex codes.

Table 8-1

Input Commands and Hex Codes

Input Commands

Read Immediate

Hex Code

Read Modified Immediate Alternate 83

Read Input Fields 42

Read MDT Fields

Read MDT Alternate

Read Screen

Save Screen

Write Structured Field

(Not supported)

Table 8-2 lists output commands and hex codes.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 8-3

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Table 8-2

Output Commands and Hex Codes

Output Commands

Clear Format Table

Clear Unit

Clear Unit Alternate

Restore Screen

Roll

Write Error Code

Write to Display

Hex Code

(Not supported)

Input and output commands are described on the following pages. The IBM 5250 Information Display System Func-

tions Reference Manual (IBM part number SA21-9247-6 provides more detailed descriptions than those presented in this programmer’s guide).

Input Commands

Input commands consist of immediate and AID-associated

Read commands. Immediate commands are executed when the controller receives the command. AID-associated commands are queued until the operator presses an AID-generating key such as Enter/Rec Adv. Other AID-generating keys are listed in the section for each wireless station.

Read Immediate (Immediate)

Command

Function. The Read Immediate command is similar to the

Read Screen command, except the data comes from the format table rather than the display.

8-4 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

" NOTE:

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

The command sends back the contents of all the input fields on the display.

Restrictions. This command must be the last command in the chain and the controller must have change of direction

(CD). The command is rejected if the wireless station is in an error, system request, or SS message state.

If the display supports a separate message line, and the message line is selected, the command is rejected only for the system request and SS message states. The command is processed with the display in error state.

Format. The command takes the following form:

ESC

Hex 04

Read Immediate Command

Hex 72

Results. Information associated with this command returns to the user in the LU-LU nonexpedited flow. What the user receives when they issue this command depends on the condition of the master modified data tag (MDT) bit:

If the MDT bit is not set, the user receives:

Cursor Address AID Code

If the master MDT bit is set, the user receives:

Cursor Address AID Code Field Data

The field data consists of the contents of all input fields as they appear on the display, unless resequencing has been specified. Any attributes contained in a field are treated as data and returned as such. Field boundary attributes are not considered part of the field. All nulls are converted to blanks. If the specified field is a signed numeric field, the last character is not sent.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 8-5

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

" NOTE:

If that same field is negative, the zone position of the nextto-the-last character is changed to hex D. In each case, the returned cursor address indicates the current location of the cursor and the AID code is hex 00.

Queued Read commands and pending AID codes are not cleared.

The format table, display annunciators, insert mode keying history, and display contents are not affected.

Read Modified Immediate Alternate

Command

Read Modified Immediate Alternate command enables the host to read data from modified input fields without depending on the operator to press an AID request key.

Format. The command takes the following form:

ESC

Hex 04

Read Modified Immediate Alternate Command

Hex 83

Results. This command is processed the same as the Read

Immediate command, except for these differences in the format of data sent to host:

Controller only returns data from those fields in the format table that have the MDT bit on.

Data field is delimited by Set Buffer Address (SBA) orders in the same way as the response data field for the Read MDT Fields command.

Leading and imbedded nulls within each field’s data are not converted to blanks.

Trailing nulls within each field’s data are suppressed.

8-6 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Read Input Fields Command

Function. The Read Input Fields command causes the wireless station to wait for the operator to press an active

AID-generating key, then sends the contents of all fields defined in the format table to the host.

Restrictions. The operator must press an AID-generating key to execute this command. Also, CD in the Request/Response Header (RH) must be on before the AID byte can be serviced. This command is cleared if:

The host system issues a session control request (such as Unbind).

The host system issues a Clear Unit command and the controller executes it.

The host system sends another Read command to the same LU and overlays this command.

The Read command is executed.

Format. The command takes the following form:

ESC

Hex 04

Read Input

Fields Command CC Byte 1

Hex 42 Hex 00

CC Byte 2

Hex 13

Results. Information associated with this command returns to the user in the LU-LU nonexpedited flow. Note that the host system cannot receive this information until the operator presses an AID-generating key. What the user receives when they issue this command depends on the condition of the master MDT bit:

If the master MDT bit is not set, the user receives:

Cursor Address AID Code

-- Cursor Address: Position of the cursor when the

AID-generating key was pressed.

-- AID Code: Code for the AID-generating key the operator used.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 8-7

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

The user receives the cursor address and AID code if any of the following keys are pressed:

Clear

Help

Record Backspace in home position

If the master MDT bit is on, the user receives:

Cursor Address AID Code Field Data

-- Cursor Address: Position of the cursor when the

AID-generating key was pressed.

-- AID Code: Code for the AID-generating key the operator used.

-- Field Data: Returned only when one of the following AID-generating keys is used:

Roll up/Page down

Roll down/Page up

Enter/Rec Adv

An unmasked function key

When it is returned, the field data consists of the contents of all input fields as they appear on the display unless resequencing has been specified.

Any attributes in a field are treated as data and returned as such. Field attributes are not considered part of the field. All nulls are converted to blanks. All pending AID request bytes are cleared. If the specified field is signed numeric, the first character is not sent; if that same field is negative, the zone position of the next-to-the-last character is changed to hex D. Though data is not sent, the CC bytes are processed.

To determine the appropriate codes for the control character

(CC) bytes, see Table 8-3 and Table 8-4 under the Write To

Display topic (page 8-22).

8-8 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Format of Returned Data. The format of the returned data is:

Bytes 1 and 2 Byte 3

Cursor address AID code

Byte 4

Field data

Byte 5

Field data

Byte 6 and all that follow contain the remaining field data from the format table. The wireless station returns complete contents of each field, with nulls converted to blanks.

Read MDT Fields Command

Function. The Read MDT Fields command causes the wireless station to wait for the operator to press an active AIDgenerating key, then sends all fields that have their MDT bit set. The bit could have been set by the operator entering data in the field or by the Write to Display (WTD) command.

Restrictions. The operator must press an AID-generating key to execute this command. In addition, the CD in the

RH for the requested LU must be on before any information can be sent back to the host system in response to the command. The command is cleared if:

A session control request (such as Unbind) is issued by the host.

A Clear Unit command is issued.

The host system sends another Read command to the same LU and overlays this command.

The Read command is serviced.

Format. The command take the following form:

ESC

Hex 04

Read MDT Command CC Byte 1 CC Byte 2

Hex 52 00 13

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 8-9

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

" NOTE:

Format of Returned Data. The format of the returned data is:

Byte 1 and 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5

Cursor address AID code {SBA Field address

Byte 6

Field data}

The {} brackets around the last three fields indicate these fields may be repeated as a unit.

The cursor address gives the cursor location on the display.

The SBA fields are formatted as Set Buffer Address orders.

The field address comes from the address portion of the order and gives the address of the modified field (excluding the attribute).

Results. The contents of each field that has an MDT bit on are returned to the host system in the order that the fields appear in the format table, if one of the following AID-generating keys is used:

Roll up/Page down

Roll down/Page up

Enter/Rec Adv

Unmasked function keys

If no MDT bits are on, or if the operator does not use one of the acceptable AID-generating keys (Clear, Help, Print, or

Record Backspace), only the cursor and AID code are returned to the host system.

The host system can use field control words (FCWs) to rearrange the sequence in which the fields are returned. If data is returned, the following formatting is done. If the field is not a transparent data field, the following occurs:

8-10 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Trailing nulls are stripped. If the field consists of all nulls, only the Set Buffer Address, row, and column are returned.

Leading and embedded nulls are converted to blanks.

If the field is signed numeric, the last character is not sent.

If that same field is negative, the zone position of the nextto-the-last character is changed to hex D.

Hex 10 and hex 11 are control data. Therefore, avoid writing hex 10 and hex 11 to the display as data unless they are written in transparent data fields.

Read MDT Alternate Command

Read MDT Alternate is similar to the Read MDT Fields command with these exceptions:

Leading and embedded nulls within the fields remain nulls. Trailing nulls are stripped.

For fields that are nulls but have their MDT bit on, the controller returns an SBA order followed by the field’s address.

Read Screen (Immediate)

Command

Function. The Read Screen command sends the contents of the display to the host in the same order information appears on the screen. For example, row 1 goes first.

Restrictions. This command must be the last command in the SNA chain, and CD must be on. The wireless station rejects the command when it is in the prehelp error, posthelp error, system request, or SS message state. During transmission the keyboard is locked, but pending AID requests or Read commands are retained.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 8-11

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

" NOTE: If the display supports a separate message line, and the message line is selected, the command is rejected only for the system request and SS message states. The command is processed with the display in error state.

Format. The command takes the following form:

ESC

Hex 04

Read Screen Command

Hex 62

Results. The contents of the entire display, including the attributes, is sent to the host system just as it appears in the regeneration buffer (no formatting or conversion is done). Cursor address and AID are not returned. This command does not clear either pending Read commands or

AID requests. The keyboard is temporarily locked. The following are unaltered:

Annunciators

Cursor location

Modes

Keying history

Display contents

Format table

Save Screen (Immediate)

Command

Function. The Save Screen command sends the state of the wireless station to the host. Information sent to the host includes:

8-12 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Format table

Display buffer

Keyboard state

Cursor location

Code returned in response to the Help key

Any outstanding AID requests

Any outstanding Read commands

Restrictions. This command must be the last command in the SNA chain and CD must be on. The command is rejected if the addressed LU is in either the system request or SS message state.

Format. The command takes the following form:

ESC

Hex 04

Save Screen Command

Hex 02

Format of Returned Data. The format of the returned data is:

Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4

Escape Restore Screen <terminal state> <terminal state>

Byte 5 and all remaining bytes contain the save screen information.

Results. All data required for restoring the display are sent to the host system. It must not be modified by the host system if the result of the Restore Screen command is to have integrity.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 8-13

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Output Commands

Some of the output commands have associated data and control information (write characters and orders). The

Write commands are executed immediately.

" NOTE:

Clear Format Table Command

Function. The Clear Format Table command clears the format table without erasing data in the display buffer.

Restrictions. The wireless station rejects the command when in an error, system request, or SS message state.

Format. The command takes the following form:

ESC

Hex 04

Clear Format Table Command

Hex 50

Results. The following list describes what happens when this command is executed.

The keyboard is locked.

-- The keyboard clicker is turned off.

-- The Input Inhibited annunciator is turned on.

-- The insert mode is cleared (as is the annunciator).

The format table is cleared. The format table header formats like this:

8-14 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

" NOTE:

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Item

Format ID

First field transmitted to host system

Error line

Value

Hex 00

0 (Resequencing is disabled)

Bottom line of display

The system insert cursor address is set to row 1, column 1. This clears a previous Insert Cursor order.

Any pending AID request is cleared.

All keying history is cleared.

The master MDT bit is cleared.

A blinking cursor caused by waiting for a required

Field Exit key is reset.

Operator-selected reverse image and the Message Waiting annunciator are not affected by this command.

Clear Unit Command

Function. This command clears the display and format table.

Restrictions. The wireless station rejects the command when it is in the SS message state.

Format. The command takes the following form:

ESC

Hex 04

Clear Unit Command

Hex 40

Results. When the wireless station receives the Clear Unit command, the following occurs:

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 8-15

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

" NOTE:

The keyboard locks.

-- The Input Inhibited annunciator is turned on.

-- The error state (or system request state) is cleared.

-- The shift, alternate, function, and insert modes are cleared.

The format table is cleared. Because this is not format level 0, a default header is assumed.

The MDT bit is cleared.

All function keys are set up to return data.

The display is cleared by writing nulls to the display buffer.

A normal attribute is written byte to row 1, column 1 of the display.

The cursor is placed at row 1, column 2; this makes the insert cursor address.

Any AID requests and pending Read Input Fields or

Read MDT Fields commands are cleared.

Operated-selected reverse image and the Message Waiting annunciator are not affected by this command.

Restore Screen Command

Function. The Restore Screen command restores all data stored by the last Save Screen command.

Restrictions. The wireless station rejects this command when it is in a system request or SS message state.

Format. The command takes the following form:

ESC

Restore Screen

Command

Hex 04 Hex 12

Data From Last Save Command

8-16 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

" NOTE:

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Results. The following describes what happens when this command is executed.

These are restored:

Contents of the display.

Contents of the format table.

State of the keyboard, including the insert mode with the annunciators.

Location of the cursor and the way it was displayed.

System insert cursor address.

State of the master MDT bit.

Error code and any explanatory information provided by the host system in the Write Error Code command, if the wireless station was in an error state. The error code and any information are returned via the operator’s use of the Help key.

Requirements to send LU-LU Lustat when error line is available.

Any Read command that was pending at the time.

Any AID requests that were outstanding at the time of the Save Screen command.

These conditions from the previous save are not restored:

Condition of the Shift key and the associated annunciator.

Status of the Message Waiting annunciator.

The current status of the hex mode is reset.

The following conditions cause parameter errors:

Invalid data is detected.

The required amount of data is not received.

A Clear Unit command is executed if an error is detected.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 8-17

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

" NOTE:

Roll Command

Function. The Roll command causes the image presented in the wireless station display to roll up or down across the larger image area available on the 5291 Display Station.

Restrictions. The command is rejected if the display is in the prehelp error, posthelp error, system request, or SS message state.

If the display supports a separate message line, and the message line is selected, the command is rejected only for system request and

SS message states. The command is processed with the display in error state.

Format. The command consists of 5 bytes in the following form:

ESC Command Direction

Hex 04 Hex 23 Hex 08

Row Number

Top

Hex 01

Bottom

Hex 23

Bits in the direction byte define the direction and number of lines to roll. See the following chart for the bit meanings.

Bit 7 is the most significant bit.

Bit

6 through 0

Description

0 = Roll up

1 = Roll down

Number of lines to roll

The top row number tells the first line for inclusion in the roll. Bottom row number tells the last row number to include. Top and bottom row numbers together define the number of lines presented on the display for the roll.

8-18 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

" NOTE:

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Results. The following conditions govern the Roll command:

Lines vacated due to the Roll are not cleared to nulls.

Format table is not changed (could cause bizarre results).

If display does not conform to the format table, roll should not be done.

Rolled over data is lost.

The lines rolled out of the area are lost (cannot be rolled back onto the screen).

The state of the keyboard is not affected.

Pending AID bytes are not affected.

The following conditions cause parameter errors:

-- A top line of zero.

-- A top line greater than or equal to the display length.

-- A bottom line of zero.

-- A bottom line greater than the display length.

-- A top line greater than or equal to the bottom line.

-- A roll area greater than the bottom line minus the top line.

A scroll distance of zero has no effect on the display.

Write Error Code Command

Function. The Write Error Code command forces the wireless station into the prehelp state (the same state the wireless station enters when the operator makes a keying error).

Restrictions. A Write Error Code clears any outstanding

AID requests. The wireless station rejects the Write Error

Code command if it is in the prehelp, system request, or SS messages state.

Format. The command may take any of the following forms:

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 8-19

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

" NOTE: Headings in brackets indicate you can omit the individual field. However, you may not omit both fields. You must provide either an Insert

Cursor order or error message to avoid an error condition.

ESC

Hex 04

Write Error

Code Command

Hex 21

Insert Cursor Order

Position cursor

ESC

Hex 04

Write Error

Code Command

Hex 21

Error Message

ESC

Write Error

Code Command

Hex 04 Hex 21

Insert Cursor

Order Error Message

Position cursor <message text>

The Insert Cursor (IC) order may also be embedded in the error message.

Results. You can use the IC order to place the cursor at the beginning of the field where the error occurred. This helps the operator find the source of the error. The IC order does not affect where the error message is written.

The wireless station writes only the first 78 bytes of the error message to the error line. If the error line is already used for error presentation, the wireless station saves data on the error line and restores it after the operator presses the Reset key.

When the operator presses the Help key (prehelp error state only) in response to the error condition, characters from columns 2, 3, 4, and 5 of the error line are returned to the host system in a packed form and sent as a Signal command.

8-20 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

These characters form an index code that elicits a user-generated description of the error for the operator.

Prehelp error state is selected for the keyboard.

Input Inhibited annunciator is on.

Insert mode and Insert annunciator are cleared.

Command, dead key diacritic, and hex modes are cleared.

Cursor is blinking.

The line in the format table header defined as an error line is saved.

Cursor moves to the location specified by the IC order.

If no IC order is given, the cursor does not move.

All characters (except IC order) found between the command byte and the end of the chain or next ESC are written on the error line. If the data exceeds 80 characters, an error occurs.

All outstanding AID bytes are cleared.

When the operator presses [HELP], the controller places a nonblink high intensity attribute in column 1 of the error line, replacing anything that was previously there.

The locked state of the keyboard is cleared if the keyboard was locked and the wireless station was not in a posthelp error state. This allows the operator to release the keyboard by pressing the Reset key.

The following conditions cause parameter errors:

Neither an IC order nor data follows the command.

Invalid IC order.

More data than 80 bytes is specified.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 8-21

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Write to Display (WTD) Command

Function. The WTD command does the following:

Modifies the format table and display buffer contents.

Governs modified data tag (MDT) flags and Message

Waiting annunciator.

Nulls nonbypass fields.

Controls keyboard lock and cursor blink.

Restrictions. This command is rejected if the display is in a prehelp error, posthelp error, system request, or SS message state.

If the display supports a separate message line, and the message line is selected, then only system request or SS message state result in a contention state error. If the error line is in use, however, and the WTD attempts to redefine the error line (using Start of Header byte 4), a negative response is generated.

Format. The WTD command takes either of the following forms.

ESC

WTD

Command

Hex 04 Hex 11

CC Byte 1 CC Byte 2

Hex 00 Hex 13

Hex 04 Hex 11 Hex 00 Hex 13

Orders or Data

<data>

Notes. CC Byte 1 and CC Byte 2 are the write control characters. CC Byte 1 may do the following:

Clear the master MDT flag and reset the MDT flags.

Null all appropriate nonbypass fields.

CC Byte 2 sets the following:

Cursor blink

Keyboard lock

8-22 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Alarm

Message Waiting annunciator

Orders are described in detail later in this section. Any character that is not an order and not associated with an order is considered data, and is written on the screen at the current display address. The address is then incremented by 1 for each character written. These characters should be hex 00, hex 1C, or above hex 1F, so there is no conflict with the codes reserved for orders.

Results. If the WTD command changes the format table, the keyboard remains locked until specifically unlocked by

CC Byte 1 or a subsequent WTD command.

See Table 8-3 to determine the appropriate command for your particular combination of needs. To select a command, check the body of the table for the row showing the desired combination of conditions. Then refer to the left-most column to find the corresponding hex code.

Hex Reset Pending AID,

Code & Lock Keyboard

Table 8-3

Write to Display Control Byte 1

Clear Master MDT &

Reset MDT Flags

Nonbypass

Fields All

Null All Appropriate

Nonbypass Fields

Field with

MDT On All

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 8-23

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Table 8-4 describes bit positions for CC byte 2. The most significant bit is 7; the least significant bit is 0.

Table 8-4

Write to Display Control Byte 2

Bit Position Description

7 Always 00

6 0 = Cursor moves to default or IC order position when keyboard unlocks.* 1 = Cursor does not move when keyboard unlocks.

0 = No action, 1 = Reset blinking cursor

0 = No action, 1 = Set blinking cursor (if reset bit also = 1)

3 0 = No action, 1 = Unlock keyboard, reset pending AID bytes

0 = No action, 1 = Sound alarm

0 = No action, 1 = Reset Message Waiting annunciator

0 0 = No action, 1 = Set Message Waiting annunciator (even if bit 5 is set to 1)

* Exception: When a WTD is received when the keyboard is unlocked and the WTD does not modify the keyboard state.

The following conditions cause parameter errors:

Invalid orders.

No data, orders, or CC follow the command byte.

Orders

The following pages describe the host 5250 data stream orders the host can send to wireless stations on the radio data network. Orders govern format and data expectations within the WTD command (page 8-22).

8-24 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

" NOTE:

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

The host application can include wireless station orders in the WTD command, either alone or intermixed with display data. The wireless station executes orders sequentially.

The wireless station does not store orders in the display buffer with other data in the data stream.

Five buffer control orders position, define, and format data written into the buffer, erase selected unprotected data in the buffer, and reposition the cursor. A sixth order, Transparent Data, provides a way to write transparent data to the display. Table 8-5 lists orders and their hex codes.

Table 8-5

Write to Display Command Orders

Command

Insert Cursor

Move Cursor

Repeat to Address

Set Buffer Address

Start of Field

Start of Header

Transparent Data

Hex Code

Insert Cursor (IC) Order

Function. The IC order:

Sets the system insert cursor (IC) address to the location specified by the 2 bytes that follow the order when it is included in the WTD command, or

Moves the cursor to the specified address without affecting the system IC address when it is included in the Write Error Code command. Byte 1 gives the row address and byte 2 gives the cursor address.

If multiple IC orders appear in the Write data stream, the last one encountered is used in subsequent operations.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 8-25

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Restrictions. A parameter error is posted when:

There are fewer than 2 bytes following the order.

The row address equals 0 or is greater than 24.

The column address equals 0 or is greater than 80.

Format. The order takes the following form:

Insert Cursor Order Row Address Column Address

Hex 13 Hex 01 Hex 01

Results. When the order is used in the WTD command, the cursor is not immediately moved; the address is saved for later use. The cursor is moved when the entire WTD is completed.

When the order is used in the Write Error Code command, the cursor is moved to the address given in the IC order and does not affect the system IC address. The cursor exits the field regardless of the type and does not perform any field checks. For example, it does not check for a filled field for a field specified as mandatory fill.

You can use the IC order in the Write Error Code command to tell the wireless station operator where an error has occurred. Maximum row and column addresses are determined by the character size selected through the wireless station’s firmware.

Move Cursor (MC) Order

MC order enables the host to move the cursor to a specified position without modifying the home address, and without regard to the keyboard’s state.

Format. The order takes the following form:

MC Order

Hex 14

Row Address Column Address

1 byte 1 byte

8-26 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

" NOTE:

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

If the WTD data stream contains multiple IC or MC orders, the last IC or MC order determines the cursor position. The

IC order negates any previously coded MC orders and the

MC order negates any previously coded IC orders, with the exception that the last IC order establishes home position.

To set the home position and then move the cursor, code the

IC order, and then the MC order.

WTD control character values do not affect the MC order, including the move cursor flag. See Table 8-4 on page 8-24 for more information.

Repeat to Address (RA) Order

Function. The RA order stores a specified alphanumeric or null character in all buffer locations starting at the current buffer address and ending on the specified stop address.

This stop address and the character to repeat are identified by the 3 bytes immediately following the RA order in the

Write data stream. You can use RA orders to fill an area of the display.

Restrictions. A parameter error is posted when:

Fewer than 3 bytes follow the order.

A row address equals 0 or is greater than 24.

The specified ending address is less than the current display address.

Although any character can be repeated, avoid using hex 11 (Set

Buffer Address order), because this value is used as the delimiter between the fields sent in response to the Read MDT Fields command.

Results. The character is repeated from the current display address through the ending display address specified. The current display address is then updated to the value of the last position +1.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 8-27

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Set Buffer Address (SBA) Order

Function. The SBA order specifies a new buffer address from which operations are to start or continue. You can use the SBA order to:

Write data into various areas of the buffer.

Precede another order in the data stream to specify the starting address for a Repeat to Address.

Specify the address at which an attribute byte is stored by a Start of Field order.

Restrictions. A parameter error is posted when:

Fewer than 2 bytes follow the order.

The row address is equal to 0 or greater than 24.

The column size equals 0 or is greater than 80.

Default. When the SBA is not specified in the Write To Display (WTD) command, the data starts at row 1, column 1.

This is where the WTD command initialized it.

Format. The SBA order takes the following form:

SBA Order

Hex 11

Row Address

Hex 01

Column Address

Hex 01

Row addresses begin with 1, as do column addresses. However, the wireless station accepts column address hex 00 and translates it to column 1.

Start of Field (SF) Order

Function. The SF order defines input and output fields. If an input field is being defined, it also resets any pending

AID byte and locks the keyboard.

8-28 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

" NOTE:

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Although this order can be used for output fields, it is not recommended because it degrades performance. Use the SBA order instead.

Format. SF order takes the following form with minimal information:

SF Order

Hex 1D

Attribute

Hex 01

Length

Hex 0012

You may also include format and control information in the

SF order. In these cases it takes one of the following forms:

Brackets around “format” and “control” headings indicate these fields are optional.

SF Order

Hex 1D

[Format]

Hex 4000

Attribute

Hex 01

Length

Hex 0012

SF Order [Format] [Control] ] Attribute Length

Hex 1D Hex 4000 Hex 8102 Hex 01 Hex 0012

You can only include the control word after you have provided a format word. You can also insert several control words between the format and attribute portions of the SF order, but these control words are not required.

Table 8-6 describes the format portion, Table 8-8 the control portion, and Table 8-9 the attribute portion of the SF order.

The 2-byte Field Format Word (FFW) contains the information described in Table 8-8.

The two most significant bits (15 and 14) must always be hex 01. See Table 8-6 for descriptions of bits 13 through 0.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 8-29

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Table 8-6

Field Format Word for Start of Field Order

Bit 15 is the most significant bit.

Bit Number Description

14--15 Always 01 (reserved)

13 0 = Nonbypass field

1 = Bypass field

0 = Duplication not allowed

1 = Duplication allowed

0 = Field has not been modified (MDT) bit

1 = Field has been modified

10--8

000 = Alpha shift

001 = Alpha only

010 = Numeric shift

011 = Numeric only

100 = Katakana shift (not supported)

101 = Digits only

110 = I/O (feature input field)

111 = Signed numeric

0 = Auto enter disabled

1 = Auto enter when field is exited

0 = Field Exit key is not required

1 = Field Exit key is required.

0 = Accept lower case letters

1 = Translate lower case to upper case

2--0

Reserved

0 = No mandatory entry

1 = Mandatory entry

000 = No adjustment

001 = Reserved

010 = Reserved

011 = Reserved

100 = Reserved

101 = Right adjust, zero fill

110 = Right adjust, blank fill

111 = Mandatory fill

8-30 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

FCWs (2 bytes each) are optional. The user program can use the WTD command to send FCWs to the controller.

When FCWs are used, they should follow the FFW of the SF order. An FCW encountered during modification of an existing format table entry is ignored. The LU does not accept an FCS of hex FFxx.

Table 8-7 lists valid FCWs and functions supported by the wireless stations.

Table 8-7

Field Control Words

Value

(Hex) Function

80nn Entry field resequencing. The “nn” specifies the next entry field in the sequence (hex 00 to 80).

8101

8103

84nn

B140

B1A0

Magnetic stripe reader (MSR) entry field.

MSR and selector light pen (SLP) entry field.

Transparency entry field. The “nn” is any two digits.

Self-check modulus 11 entry field.

Self-check modulus 10 entry field.

The first FCW of any type is used; subsequent FCWs of the same type are ignored. The controller does not check to see if the FCWs are formatted correctly or if the requested function is installed. During subsequent command and keystroke processing, the controller detects and reports these errors to the host if the FCW is required.

FCWs types are as follows.

Resequencing. Resequencing enables the controller to send the input fields to the host in any specified order.

Resequencing is done by chaining input fields with

FCWs that specify the desired order of transmission.

The resequencing FCW takes the following format:

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 8-31

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Bits

0--1

2--7

8--15

Description

B 10

B 000000

The normal sequence position of the next field to be returned to the host. (The first field on the screen is number 1. Field numbers progress sequentially, left to right and top to bottom.)

Bit 3 of the Start of header (SOH) order contains the number of the field to be sent. If the first field identifier in the SOH is zero, resequencing does not occur.

That is, all resequencing FCWs are ignored. Fields are sent to the host in the order defined in the format table. If resequencing occurs, the last field to be sent to the host must contain this FCW:

Bits

0--1

2--7

8--15

Description

B 10

B 000000

B 11111111

Notes. The following apply:

If FCWs create a closed loop, the controller detects the error and stops the transmission.

An FCW for each field is not required. An FCW pointing to the next sequential field is assumed if no resequencing FCW is specified. The last field in the format table must have a resequencing

FCW.

MSR. MSR enables the scanner for an input field.

SLP. SLP is accepted, but ignored.

Transparency. Transparency defines a field that can contain data of any value.

8-32 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Self-Check. Self-check on the controller provides additional integrity for data entry. All field types can be specified for self-checking. The following requirements must be met when specifying a field for selfchecking:

An FCW must be defined for the field. Hex B1A0 selects Modulus 10 checking, and hex B140 selects Modulus 11.

Field lengths for checking are restricted to 33 positions. For signed numeric fields, only 32 positions can contain digits and the sign is not checked. If more than 33 characters are given a

LUSTAT parameter error results.

Self-check resolves fields and conditions as follows:

The function converts nonnumeric characters

(including nulls and blanks) by using the four low-order bits from their EBCDIC representation when the low-order bits are in the range 0--9.

For example, A in EBCDIC is C1, thus A = 1. R in EBCDIC is D9, thus R = 9.

A “0” replaces all other characters with the four low-order bits in the range of A through F. For example, % is EBCDIC 6C, thus % = 0.

Null and blank characters also convert to 0. All high-order nulls, zeros, and blanks in a field are converted to 0 and do not affect the value of the check number.

An all-null field checks correctly. This field can result when the operator unsuccessfully tried to enter digits into a field and checking fails. The controller enables the operator to exit the field from the first position by using the Field Exit key.

Following are field descriptions.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 8-33

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Field Type

Alpha only

Alpha shift

Auto enter

Bypass

Digits only

Description

Accepts only the characters A--Z (uppercase and lowercase) and the , . -- and blank space.

Accepts all data keys. The shift keys are acknowledged.

When the operator uses [FIELD EXIT] key to leave this field or puts the last character in the field, the wireless station treats the action as if the operator pressed [ENTER].

Operator cannot put entries in this field. Attempts to enter data cause a keying error.

Operator can only put the characters 0--9 in this field. The

[DUP] key is allowed if enabled.

Duplication Allows operator to use the [DUP] key. When the operator presses [DUP], the controller fills the field from the cursor to the end of the field with “1C.” (Typically the host program uses this to place data from a previous record into the field when it receives the data.) An overstruck asterisk is displayed for the

“1C” characters.

Operator can only exit the field by pressing a non-data key such as [FIELD EXIT] or other cursor-moving key.

Field Exit key required

I/O Only the scanner can put data in this field.

Mandatory entry The operator must put data in this field before pressing

[ENTER] or another AID-generating key.

Mandatory fill When the operator begins putting data into this field, they must completely fill it before exiting from it.

Modified

Numeric only

Marks this field as modified.

Accepts only the characters 0--9 and the symbols + , . -- and blank. [FIELD+] exits the field with a positive number;

[FIELD--] with a negative number. [FIELD EXIT] exits the field as entered with the sign specified by the host. The controller marks a minus field by changing the high nibble of the last byte to “B” unless a + , . -- or blank is in that byte. These characters cause an error to occur.

8-34 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Field Type

Numeric shift

Right- adjust

Self-check

Description

Accepts any data characters.

When the operator exits the field, the controller shifts the contents to the right and fills on the left with zeros or blank spaces, as specified. Bits 13--15 can be 0. This allows the operator to make entries into any part of the field without any subsequent position adjustment. When the controller sends the field to the host, it also sends whatever is in the field (nulls if a Clear Unit command was received).

Modulus 10 self-check fields perform a mod 10 check on the input. Modulus 11 self-check fields perform a mod 11 check on the input. The controller performs these checks when the operator exits the field. If the checks fail, an input error is indicated and the Input Inhibited annunciator is turned on. The operator must press the [RESET] key to clear the condition.

The radio data network checks data by doing the appropriate modus on the low four bits of the characters in the field. If the low four bits are within the range “A” through “F,” zero is used in the modulus calculation.

Signed numeric Only the characters 0--9 are allowed. The last byte of the field is reserved for the sign character. The operator cannot place data in this location. If the operator presses [FIELD--] to exit the field, the last character is set to “--” and the field is right adjusted. The high nibble of the last digit input is set to “B.” If the operator uses [FIELD+] or [FIELD EXIT] to exit the field, the last character is set to blank and the field is right-adjusted. The

“--” or “blank” is sent in response to Read Input Fields or Read

MDT Fields commands.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 8-35

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Table 8-8 describes the control portions of the SF order.

Hex Code

80XX

80FF

8101

8102

B1A0

B140

Table 8-8

Start of Field Control Word

Description

Resequencing, “xx ” defines next field number

Resequencing, terminator

Enable scanner (extended 5250); this is IBM’s

MSR option

Reserved (extended 5250)

Modulus 10 self-check

Modulus 11 self-check

Table 8-9 describes the attribute portions of the SF order.

Hex Code

Table 8-9

Start of Field Attributes

Description

Normal (dark characters on light background)

Reverse image (light characters on dark background)

Underscore

Blink (RT1700 Series and RT5900 Series only)

Nondisplay

Column separator

Results. The SF order does the following:

The display address is set to the end-of-field address

(as specified by the last SF order + 1). This does not happen if this is the first SF order or if an SBA order precedes it (the SBA points at the field starting attribute).

8-36 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

The screen attribute in the SF order is written into the location defined by the display address.

The start-of-field address is set to the display address

+1.

The end-of-field address is set to the display address + the field length specified by the SF order. The ending screen attribute is written to the end-of-field +1. This is a “20.”

The display address is incremented by 1.

If this is an input field (one in which a field format word has been specified), a format table entry consisting of the field format and the FCWs is generated. In addition, if the SF order is rejected, the keyboard is locked and any outstanding AID byte is cleared.

The format table is modified if the display address +1 is equal to the starting address of an input field that was previously defined. This happens as follows:

-- The field format word of the previously defined field is overlaid with the new one.

-- All FCWs and length parameters that were specified are ignored. Two bytes, however, are still required for the length even though no value check is performed on them.

-- The field ending address is set equal to the field’s original ending address.

-- The screen ending address is not rewritten.

-- The defined field is not null filled. If any data characters follow the length field, they are written into the defined field.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 8-37

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Start of Header (SOH) Order

Function. The SOH order notifies the wireless station that the next byte in the Write data steam contains a header order. The order specifies header information for the format table. When the controller receives this order, it first clears the format table, then inserts the contents of the SOH order.

Restrictions. A parameter error is posted when the output data stream ends before the number of bytes needed have been sent or when the first byte of the order is not between

1 and 254.

Format. The SOH order takes the following form:

Function

Order

Length

Reserved

Resequence

Error row

F keys

Hex Code

000000

Results. Because the length of this order varies, the first byte after the order code contains the number of bytes included. Length may range from 0 through 7 bytes.

A length of 7 bytes enables or disables selected function keys designated by the bits in bytes 5 through 7. When bits are enabled, function keys return AID codes with input data. When bits are inhibited, or length is less than 7, function keys return AID codes but without input data.

Table 8-10 shows the data-included switches for the function keys. In the table: 0 = enable, 1 = inhibit, and bit 0 is the most significant bit.

8-38 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Table 8-10

Function Key Bit Switches

Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7

Bit # Function Key Bit # Function Key Bit # Function Key

0 F24 0 F16 0 F8

F23

F22

F21

F20

F15

F14

F13

F12

F19

F18

F17

F11

F10

You can use resequencing to point to a field, other than the first, as the field you want sent to the host in response to a

Read Input Fields or Read MDT Fields command

(Table 8-11). If not zero, the FCW of the field is checked as each field is sent to see whether resequencing is enabled. If so, the FCW points to the next field to send. If the FCW has resequencing disabled (or no FCW exists for the field), the next defined field is sent and checked for resequencing.

Bits

0000 0000

XXXX XXXX

Table 8-11

Resequencing

Description

Disable resequencing

Number of first field to be transmitted to the host, in response to a Read Input

Fields or Read MDT Fields Command

The error row may vary from 0 to 24. Row “00” signifies the default row, which is the last line for most 5250 devices.

You can use other values to override the default row.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 8-39

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Transparent Data (TD) Order

Function. The TD order lets you send data with any value to the wireless station display.

Format. The order takes the following form:

TD Order

Hex 10

Length (2 Bytes)

Hex 0020

Data

<data>

The 2-byte length field after the order tells how many bytes of data follow.

Asynchronous 5250 Prefixes

Each asynchronous 5250 data stream command is preceded by a variable-length prefix. The first byte of the prefix contains the number of bytes in the prefix, not including the length byte. The length may be zero, which indicates an empty prefix.

The second byte of the prefix (if the length is non-zero) must be either hex 40 or C0.

Hex 40 indicates that the data in the rest of the message is LU-LU (normal 5250 commands).

C0 indicates that the rest of the message is SS-LU data (an SS message). SS messages cause the wireless station to enter the SS message state, where the only allowable keystroke is Reset. The SS message is a oneline message that is displayed on the wireless station’s status line until the Reset key is pressed.

After hex 40 or C0, the 5250 prefix may contain one 5250 signal. A signal is a sequence of 5 bytes that tells the wireless station to perform a special operation.

8-40 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

The wireless station supports the Signal command formats in the following chart.

Hex Code

C9 00 00 00 01

Description

Signal operator (turns on the Message

Waiting annunciator and sounds the audible alarm)

Resets the Message Waiting annunciator C9 00 00 00 05

A parameter error is posted when less data is in the message than indicated by the length byte. This causes a parameter error of “21.” If the wireless station encounters data it does not understand, it ignores the rest of the prefix.

System Messages and

Parameter Errors

The wireless station’s display reserves a line for status information. The status line can display system (non-local) information such as a message waiting from the host computer, help messages in response to the Help key, or the system request state of the wireless station. You can program the location of the status line through the Start of Header order.

System codes can also appear on the status line. On

RT1700 and RT5900 Radio Terminals, the system codes will blink. Table 8-12 lists the codes displayed when the stated condition occurs. Unless otherwise noted in the table, the wireless station’s Reset key restores the status line and returns to the keying mode in effect when the problem occurred.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 8-41

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Table 8-12

System Codes and Descriptions

Code Description

0005 Attempt to enter data when not in a field.

0006 A key other than a data key or [ENTER] was pressed in the system request state.

0007 A mandatory entry field has not had data put into it.

0008 The field is alpha only, and an invalid key was pressed.

0009 The field is numeric only, and an invalid key was pressed.

0010 The field is signed numeric, and an invalid key was pressed.

0011 Data cannot be entered into the last byte of a signed numeric field.

0012 No room in field for insert. The field is full or on the last byte.

0013 Cannot leave field while in insert mode.

0014 Field is mandatory fill and cannot be exited until filled.

0015 Mod 10 or Mod 11 check has failed on field.

0016 Field error: Cannot be used in field that is not signed numeric.

0017 Attempt to use [FIELD EXIT] key in unfilled, mandatory fill field.

0018 Only a nondata key can be used to exit this field; for example, [FIELD EXIT].

0019 [DUP] key not allowed in this field.

0020 Cannot use AID-generating key to exit signed numeric or right-adjusted field. Must use [FIELD EXIT].

8-42 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Table 8-12 (Continued)

System Codes and Descriptions

Code Description

0021 Cannot exit a mandatory enter field without entering data.

0023 Invalid hex value entered.

0026 The [FIELD--] key was pressed, but the last character of the field was not 0--9.

0099 An invalid key was pressed before the wireless station was in session. Only [SYS REQ] is allowed.

C00 An invalid 5250 command was received. This sequence of bytes is sent to the host: 01 10 03 01 01.

PXX System code where “XX” is the parameter error

(described below).

When a 5250 command contains invalid parameters, system code “PXX” appears on the bottom line of the display.

On RT1700 and RT5900 Radio Terminals, the system code will blink. The “XX” in the system code indicates the type of parameter error.

The message sent to the host is: 01 10 05 01 XX, where

“XX” is the same parameter error that was put in the wireless station’s display.

The parameter errors are a subset of the 5250 data stream command set. Those errors supported by the wireless stations are listed in Table 8-13.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 8-43

SECTION 8

Display Data Stream

Table 8-13

Parameter Errors

Parameter

Error

P21

P22

P23

P25

P26

P27

P28

P29

P2A

P2C

P30

P87

Description

Premature end of data stream.

A row or column specification is out of range.

The ending address of the Repeat to Address order is less than the start address.

A signed input field had a length of 1. It must be at least 2.

An input field start address was less than a previously-defined input field start address.

An invalid Restore Screen command was received.

An attempt was made to define an input field past the end of the display.

Format table overflow (too many input fields were defined).

An attempt was made to write data past the end of the display.

Invalid roll up or roll down parameters were received.

An invalid attribute was received as part of a

Start of Field order.

A Mod 10 or Mod 11 input field was defined with a length greater than 33.

8-44 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

Section 9 Extended Commands

" " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " "

Overview

Extended commands govern abilities unique to wireless stations. You can use extended commands to print, set menu parameters for scanning, and send communications over the wireless station’s RS-232 port. You can also use extended commands to set wireless station parameters from the host computer. The host computer sends the commands to the wireless station. The following chart lists the extended commands.

Name Characters

Transmit and Receive On RS-232 Port #F

Transmit Only On RS-232 Port

Receive Only On RS-232 Port

Set Parameters

Return Version

Tone

Scan Bar Code Parameters

To use extended commands, you must enable the extended command feature for the wireless station’s firmware. The following chart describes how to access the firmware’s main menu.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-1

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Series Main Menu

RT1100 and RT1700 [GOLD]+[BLACK]

RT5900

PEN*KEY Ò 6400

PEN*KEY 6500

[BROWN]+[SPACE]

[GOLD]+[BLUE]

[GOLD]+[M]

To enable extended commands, select the following options in this order: SET-UP PARMS, PROTOCOL OPTS,

EXTENDED CMDS, ENABLED.

Transmit and Receive On RS-232 Port

(#F)

Use the Transmit and Receive On RS-232 Port extended command to transmit and receive data on the wireless station’s RS-232 port. The command uses “#F” characters to request communication on the port.

When constructing a Transmit and Receive command, the data to be sent should be placed at Line 2, Column 1. The data must be less than 1840 bytes in length (after “=yy” compression). The last character must be a “#” (pound).

The wireless station sends the data to the RS-232 port until it detects a “#” character.

Line 2, Column 1 begins the start of transmit data. The host application must set up the screen with a transmit field to locate the RS-232 port I/O data. The field can be anywhere on the screen, beginning at position 80. The host application must supply the receive field (for response from the RS-232 port to the host). The receive field can be anywhere on the screen except for the position allocated for the return status field.

9-2 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

The output stream appears in ASCII character format. For bytes that are not displayable ASCII characters, you may insert the characters “=yy,” where “yy” is the hexadecimal representation of the output byte. For example, if your printer requires a carriage return, you would insert “=0D.”

You would insert “=0A” for a line feed. Appendix B contains other hexadecimal values.

Table 9-1 describes the line and columns where characters must appear, and their meanings.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-3

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Table 9-1

Transmit and Receive Characters

Line 1, Columns 2--24

Column Character * Description

2 # Extended command.

F Transmit and Receive On RS-232 Port command.

Speed (bits per second).

0 (zero)

(Space)

1200.

2400.

4800.

9600.

19200.

38400.

Data parity.

None.

Even.

Odd.

Number of data bits.

Seven.

Eight.

Number of stop bits.

One.

Two.

CTS flow control.

Disable.

Enable.

* Some wireless stations do not support some characters. Refer to the wireless station’s user guide for supported characters and options.

9-4 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Line 1, Columns 2--24

Column Character *

Table 9-1 (Continued)

Transmit and Receive Characters

Description

DTR flow control.

Disable

Enable

To avoid improper operation of the RT3210 Radio Terminal and the remote display, DTR flow control should be set to Disable when a remote display is in use.

XON/XOFF flow control.

11--12

Disable.

Enable.

Flow control timeout value.

Number of seconds.

Return AID key.

14--15

(Space)

AID key is Enter (default).

AID key character. See Table 9-2 (page 9-7) for return

AID key characters.

Maximum characters to receive.

(Space) dd (or)

Xd¼dX

Default.

“dd” is a decimal digit from 00--99. Default is 99.

“X” is an uppercase literal. “d¼d” is any number of decimal digits from 0--2000 inclusive. Default is 99.

* Some wireless stations do not support some characters. Refer to the wireless station’s user guide for supported characters and options.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-5

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Line 1, Columns 2--24

Column Character *

16--17

Table 9-1 (Continued)

Transmit and Receive Characters

Description

Delimiter character.

18--19

20--21

Hexadecimal ASCII code that marks the end of data to be received. Range is 00--7E. Default 00 implies no start character.

Number of delimiter characters.

Number of characters accepted before sending return code to host. Range is 00--99. Default of 00 implies no start character.

Start character.

(Space)

Hexadecimal ASCII code. Range is 00--99. Default of 00 implies no start character.

Return start character to host.

Return character.

Do not return character.

Flag parity errors.

24--25

(Space)

Flag.

Do not flag.

Receive timeout length.

XX Number of seconds the wireless station waits for input from the RS-232 port before it sends a timeout error.

Uses a default of 5 seconds when field is filled with spaces.

* Some wireless stations do not support some characters. Refer to the wireless station’s user guide for supported characters and options.

9-6 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Flow Control

Transmit supports the following three types of flow control:

RTS/CTS

DTR/DSR (RT3210 and RT5900)

XON/XOFF

Use CTS and DSR flow control lines to show XON/XOFF conditions from the output device. Also use them to prevent output when the wireless station has no output device. The

DTR of the output device should connect to either the DSR or CTS lines.

XON/XOFF is the same XON/XOFF flow control supported by most devices. The timeout value tells the wireless station how long to wait for the flow control handshake before returning a one byte error value.

On the wireless station, DTR is normally low and is raised to indicate that the wireless station is prepared for an

RS-232 data exchange.

Return AID Key Characters

Table 9-2 lists the extended command AID keys and characters returned to the host. For example, if you want an F1

AID key, you would use “A” as the character.

AID Key

Enter

Help

Roll down/Page up

Roll up/Page down

Table 9-2

Return AID Keys

)

Character

(Space)

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-7

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

F12

F13

F14

F15

F16

F17

F18

F19

F20

F21

F22

F23

F24

F10

F11

AID Key

Home

Clear

9-8 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

Table 9-2 (Continued)

Return AID Keys

Character

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Return Codes for Transmit and

Receive

Line 24, Column 1 has the return status field. The code returned in this position tells the host the status of the extended command. The following chart lists the codes.

Code Description

0 Good status, transaction complete.

1 Not enough memory. Or, incorrect setting for speed, number of data bits, number of stop bits, or flow control timeout.

No delimiter (#) on data stream.

Timeout while using CTS flow control.

Timeout while using DTR flow control.

Timeout while using XON/XOFF flow control.

Improper return field.

Hexadecimal value is outside the range of 00--0F.

Error in AID code.

Incorrect setting for maximum characters to receive.

Incorrect setting for delimiter character.

Incorrect setting for number of delimiter characters.

Incorrect setting for CTS flow control, DTR flow control, or XON/OFF flow control.

Column

(None)

4, 6, 7, 11--12

(None)

15--16, 19--20

(None)

13--14

15--16

17--18

8, 9, 10

Incorrect setting for start character.

Incorrect setting for data parity.

f/F * Timeout.

p/P * Data parity or framing error.

19--20

5, 22

(None)

R o/O *

Syntax error from RD5500 Remote Display (not the expected character; no character error was detected).

Overrun of UART receive register.

(None)

* An uppercase letter indicates an error from the RS-232 device. A lowercase letter indicates an error from the RD5500 Remote Display.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-9

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Example of Transmit and Receive

The following example and chart show what would be sent to the wireless station to cause data to be transmitted and received. A “b” indicates a space.

Column 1 Column 11 Column 23 b#F4N8100000b500A0102bb10

This is data to send.#

Line 1

Line 2

11--12

14--15

16--17

Column Character Description

1 (Space) This column typically contains a space.

Extended command.

Transmit and Receive command.

9600 baud.

No parity.

Eight data bits.

One stop bit.

18--19

20--21

24--25

(Space)

No CTS flow control.

No DTR flow control.

No XON/OFF flow control.

No flow control timeout value.

AID key is Enter.

Receive a maximum of 50 characters.

Delimiter character is 0A hexadecimal

(line feed).

Data will be sent to host after one delimiter character has been received.

Start character is 02 hexadecimal

(STX).

Start character will not be returned.

Do not flag parity errors.

Receive timeout length is 10 seconds.

9-10 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Transmit Only On RS-232 Port (#P)

The Transmit Only On RS-232 Port extended command lets the wireless station send information to a slaved RS-232 device, such as a printer or bar code printer. The command uses the RS-232 communications port to send data to the device. The wireless station checks data from the host computer for a transmit sequence, then sends the requested data. The host computer signals the wireless station for a transmit command by inserting the characters “#P” into the display at Line 1, Columns 2 and 3. Characteristics of the transmission immediately follow the #P command.

When constructing a Transmit Only command, the data to be sent should be placed at Line 2, Column 1. The data must be less than 1840 bytes in length (after “=yy” compression). The last character must be “#.” The wireless station sends the data to the RS-232 port until it detects a “#” character.

The output stream takes the form of ASCII characters. For nondisplayable ASCII characters, you may insert the characters “=yy,” where “yy” is the hexadecimal representation of the output byte. For example, if your printer requires a carriage return, you would insert “=0D.” You would insert

“=0A” for a line feed. Appendix B contains other hexadecimal values.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-11

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

" NOTE:

Table 9-3 describes the line and columns where characters must appear, and their meanings.

Line and column information refers to a 24-line by 80-column display station.

Table 9-3

Transmit Only Characters

Line 1, Columns 2--12

Column Character * Description

Extended command.

Transmit Only On RS-232 Port command.

Speed (bits per second).

0 (zero)

(Space)

1200.

2400.

4800.

9600.

19200.

38400.

Data parity.

None.

Even.

Odd.

Number of data bits.

Seven.

Eight.

* Some wireless stations do not support some characters. Refer to the wireless station’s user guide for supported characters and options.

9-12 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Table 9-3 (Continued)

Transmit Only Characters

Line 1, Columns 2--12

Column Character *

Description

Number of stop bits.

One.

Two.

CTS flow control.

Disable.

Enable.

DTR flow control.

Disable.

Enable.

11--12

To avoid improper operation of the RT3210 Radio

Terminal and the remote display, DTR flow control should be set to Disable when a remote display is in use.

XON/XOFF flow control.

Disable.

Enable.

Flow control timeout value.

Number of seconds.

Return AID key.

(Space)

AID key is Enter (default).

AID key character. See Table 9-2 (page 9-7) for return

AID key characters.

* Some wireless stations do not support some characters. Refer to the wireless station’s user guide for supported characters and options.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-13

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Flow Control

Transmit Only supports the following three types of flow control:

RTS/CTS

DTR/DSR (RT3210 and RT5900)

XON/XOFF

Use CTS and DSR flow control lines to show XON/XOFF conditions from the output device. Also use them to prevent output when the wireless station has no output device. The

DTR of the output device should connect to either the DSR or CTS lines.

For the wireless station, DTR is normally low and is raised to indicate the wireless station is prepared for an RS-232 data exchange.

Return Codes for Transmit Only

The wireless station puts the return code response in an input field in the display buffer at Line 24, Column 1. It simulates the [ENTER] key to return the value to the host.

Use the Start Field order to return a code for this operation.

The following chart lists return codes.

9-14 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Code Description

0 Good status, transaction complete.

1 Not enough memory. Or, incorrect setting for speed, number of data bits, number of stop bits, or flow control timeout.

No delimiter (#) on data stream.

Column

(None)

4, 6, 7, 11--12

(None)

Timeout while using CTS flow control.

(None)

Timeout while using DTR flow control. (None)

Timeout while using XON/XOFF flow control.

(None)

Improper return field.

Error in AID code.

Incorrect setting for CTS flow control,

DTR flow control, or XON/OFF flow control.

Incorrect setting for data parity.

E f * Timeout; no acknowledgment was received from the RD5500 Remote

Display.

p/P * Data parity or framing error.

R Syntax error from RD5500 Remote

Display (not the expected character; no character error was detected).

(None)

8, 9, 10

(None)

(None) o/O * Overrun of UART receive register.

(None)

* An uppercase letter indicates an error from the RS-232 device. A lowercase letter indicates an error from the

RD5500 Remote Display.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-15

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Example of Transmit Only

The following example and chart show what would be sent to the wireless station to cause data to be transmitted. A

“b” indicates a space. Following the example is an explanation of Line 1.

Column 1 Column 11 b#P3N8100005A

This is data to send.#

Line 1

Line 2

Column Character Description

1 (Space) This column typically contains a space.

Extended command.

Transmit Only command.

4800 baud.

No data parity.

Eight data bits.

One stop bit.

11--12

No CTS flow control.

No DTR flow control.

No XON/XOFF flow control.

Flow control timeout is 5 seconds.

AID key is [F1].

9-16 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Receive Only On RS-232 Port (#G)

The Receive Only On RS-232 Port extended command provides a way to use the RS-232 port on the wireless station to collect data. A scale is one example of a use for this command. The host computer sends “#G” characters to alert the wireless station for activity on the port.

Line 2, Column 1 is the start of the area on the screen where an input field may be placed for receive data. The host application must supply the input field for the data received on the RS-232 port. The host can place the input field anywhere on the screen except the position for the return status field.

Table 9-4 describes the line and columns where characters must appear, and their meanings.

Table 9-4

Receive Only Characters

Line 1, Columns 2--24

Column Character * Description

2 # Extended command.

3 G Receive Only On RS-232 Port command.

4 Speed (bits per second).

1200.

2400.

4800.

9600.

19200.

38400.

* Some wireless stations do not support some characters. Refer to the wireless station’s user guide for supported characters and options.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-17

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Table 9-4 (Continued)

Receive Only Characters

Line 1, Columns 2--24

Column Character *

Description

Data parity.

0 (zero)

(Space)

None.

Odd.

Even.

Number of data bits.

Seven.

Eight.

Number of stop bits.

11--12

(Space)

(Spaces)

One.

Two.

Reserved (ignored by wireless station).

Return AID key.

(Space)

AID key is Enter (default).

AID key character. See Table 9-2 (page 9-7) for return

AID key characters.

Maximum characters to receive.

14--15

(Space) dd (or)

Xd¼dX

Default.

“dd” is a decimal digit from 00--99. Default is 99.

“X” is an uppercase literal. “d¼d” is any number of decimal digits from 0--2000 inclusive. Default is 99.

* Some wireless stations do not support some characters. Refer to the wireless station’s user guide for supported characters and options.

9-18 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Table 9-4 (Continued)

Receive Only Characters

Line 1, Columns 2--24

Column Character *

16--17

Description

Delimiter character.

18--19

AA Hexadecimal ASCII code which marks the end of valid data to be received. Range is 00--7E. Default is 00.

Number of delimiter characters.

20--21

(Space)

Delimiter characters received before transmitting return code to host. Range is 00--99. Default is 00.

Start character.

Hexadecimal ASCII code for start character. Range is

00--99. Default of 00 implies no start character.

Return start character to host.

Return character.

Do not return character.

Flag parity errors.

Flag.

Do not flag.

Receive timeout length.

24--25

XX Number of seconds the wireless station waits for input from the RS-232 port before it sends a timeout error.

Uses a default of 5 seconds when this field is filled with spaces.

* Some wireless stations do not support some characters. Refer to the wireless station’s user guide for supported characters and options.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-19

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Return Codes for Receive Only

Line 24, Column 1 is the return status byte. The host application defines the 1-byte return status field location.

The following chart lists return status codes.

Code Description

0 Good status, transaction complete.

1 Not enough memory. Or, incorrect setting for speed, number of data bits, or number of stop bits.

No delimiter (#) on data stream.

Improper return field.

Hexadecimal value is outside the range of 00--0F.

Error in AID code.

Incorrect setting for maximum characters to receive.

Incorrect setting for delimiter character.

Column

(None)

4, 6, 7

(None)

15--16, 19--20

(None)

13--14

15--16

Incorrect setting for number of delimiter characters.

Incorrect setting for start character.

Incorrect setting for data parity.

f/F * Timeout.

p/P * Data parity or framing error.

17--18

19--20

5, 22

(None)

R Syntax error from RD5500 Remote Display (not the expected character; no character error was detected).

o/O * Overrun of UART receive register.

(None)

* An uppercase letter indicates an error from the RS-232 device. A lowercase letter indicates an error from the

RD5500 Remote Display.

9-20 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Example of Receive Only

The following example and chart show what would be sent to the wireless station to cause data to be received. A “b” indicates a space. The following chart describes the data.

Column 1 Column 11 Column 23 b#G3N81bbbbbb500A0102FP10

11--12

14--15

16--17

Column Character Description

1 (Space) This column typically contains a space.

Extended command.

Receive Only command.

4800 baud.

No data parity.

Eight data bits.

One stop bit.

(Space)

(Spaces)

(Space)

Reserved.

AID key is Enter.

Receive a maximum of 50 characters.

Delimiter character is 0A hexadecimal

(line feed).

18--19 01

20--21

24--25

Data will be sent to host after one delimiter character has been received.

Start character is 02 hexadecimal (STX).

Start character will be returned to host.

Parity errors will be flagged

Receive timeout length is 5 seconds.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-21

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Set Parameters (#H)

Use Set Parameters to set firmware parameters that you would otherwise set at the wireless station. The parameters are part of the firmware. Set most of the parameters once per wireless station. Set them when you install a radio data network, or when you add wireless stations to the network. Unless the wireless station fails (perhaps a dead battery) or a user does something destructive (like a

RAM test), you probably won’t need to set them again.

Table 9-5 lists columns in which characters must appear.

Table 9-5

Set Parameters Characters

Line 1, Columns 2--36

Column Character * Description

4--6

Extended command.

Set Parameters command.

Backlight timer.

7--9

(Spaces)

000

001--255

No change from current setting.

On continuously.

Seconds to remain on.

Sleep timer delay for RT3210.

(Spaces)

000

001--255

No change from current setting.

Off.

Seconds of activity before sleep.

Cursor mode.

(Space)

No change from current setting.

Underline (default).

Underline blink.

Block.

Block blink.

* Some wireless stations do not support some characters. Refer to the wireless station’s user guide for supported characters and options.

9-22 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Table 9-5

Set Parameters Characters

Line 1, Columns 2--36

Column Character *

Description

Screen mode.

(Space)

No change from current setting.

Center cursor.

Corner mode.

Page mode.

Remote display for RT3210.

No change from current setting.

Not attached.

Attached.

Stream scanning.

No change from current setting.

Disable.

Enable.

Scan all fields.

(Space)

No change from current setting.

Disable.

Enable.

Operator error mode.

(Space)

No change from current setting.

Disable beep on keyboard error. Operator must press

[RESET] after an error.

Enable beep on keyboard error. Sounds the wireless station’s error tone, then automatically resets the wireless station so that the operator can correct the error.

* Some wireless stations do not support some characters. Refer to the wireless station’s user guide for supported characters and options.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-23

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Table 9-5

Set Parameters Characters

Line 1, Columns 2--36

Column Character *

16--18

Description

Beeper volume.

19--21

(Spaces)

000--255

No change from current setting.

Range of volume; default is 255. The larger the number, the louder the volume.

Beeper frequency setting.

22--24

25--27

28--30

31--33

(Spaces)

000--030

(Spaces)

000--255

(Spaces)

000--255

(Spaces)

000--255

No change from current setting.

Frequency range; the larger the number, the higher the frequency.

Beeper length.

No change from current setting.

Duration in seconds.

Screen size.

No change from current setting.

Number of rows per display screen.

Screen size.

No change from current setting.

Number of columns per display screen.

Alternate screen size.

(Spaces)

000--255

No change from current setting.

Number of rows per display screen.

Alternate screen size.

34--36

(Spaces)

000--255

No change from current setting.

Number of columns per display screen.

* Some wireless stations do not support some characters. Refer to the wireless station’s user guide for supported characters and options.

9-24 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Return Codes for Set Parameters

The Set Parameters return code is the status sent to the host computer. The following chart lists return codes.

Code Description

0 Good status, transaction complete.

1 Reserved.

Backlight timer parameter invalid.

Sleep mode timer parameter invalid.

Cursor set parameter invalid.

Screen mode parameter invalid.

Reserved.

Remote display parameter invalid.

Beeper volume parameter invalid.

Beeper frequency parameter invalid.

Beeper length parameter invalid.

Stream scan parameter invalid.

Scan all fields parameter invalid.

Error mode parameter invalid.

Incorrect setting for number of rows.

Incorrect setting for number of columns.

Column

(None)

4--6

7--9

(None)

16--18

19--21

22--24

25--27

28--30

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-25

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Example of Set Parameters

The following example and chart show data for Set Parameters. A “b” indicates a space.

Column 1 Column 11 Column 19 Column 28 b#H099bbb4b11b0255022002010080

4--6

7--9

Column Character Description

1 (Space) This column typically contains a space.

Extended command.

Set Parameters command.

099

(Spaces)

(Space)

Backlight stays on for 99 seconds.

No change from current setting.

Cursor is in block blink mode.

No change from current setting.

(Space)

A remote display is in use.

Stream scanning is enabled.

No change from current setting.

16--18

19--21

22--24

25--27

28--30

255

022

002

010

080

Beep is disabled on keyboard error.

Beeper volume is set at 255.

Beeper frequency setting is set at 22.

Beeper length is 2 seconds.

Number of rows in primary screen size is 10.

Number of columns in primary screen size is 10.

9-26 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Return Version (#V)

The Return Version extended command returns the current firmware name and version to the host computer. Table 9-6 lists columns in which characters must appear.

Table 9-6

Return Version Characters

Line 1, Columns 2--3

Column Character Description

2 # Extended command.

3 V Return Version command.

The wireless station returns data and the extended command’s status to the host computer in the following format: tttK//rrccfl <program name><version>#s

“ttt” is the wireless station number.

“rr” is the row.

“cc” is the column.

“fl” is the AID key return value.

“s” is the status.

Tone (#T)

The Tone extended command causes the wireless station to make a tone of a specified volume, frequency, and length

(Table 9-7).

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-27

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Table 9-7

Tone Options

Line 1, Columns 2--12

Column Character Description

4--6

Extended command.

Tone command.

Tone volume.

7--9

(Spaces)

000--255

No change from current setting.

Volume range. The larger the number, the louder the volume.

Tone frequency.

(Spaces)

000--030

10--12

(Spaces)

001--010

No change from current setting.

Frequency range. The larger the number, the higher the frequency.

Tone length.

No change from current setting.

Duration in seconds. The larger the number, the longer the beep and the slower the keyboard response time.

The return code is the status sent to the host computer; the code indicates if the extended command was successful.

The wireless station returns data and the extended command’s status to the host computer in the following format:

\\X<CR>

“X” is the return code listed in the following chart.

Code Description

0 Good status, transaction complete.

Incorrect setting for volume.

Incorrect setting for frequency.

Incorrect setting for length.

Column

(None)

4--6

7--9

10--12

9-28 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Scan Bar Code Parameters (#S)

" NOTE:

The Scan Bar Code Parameters extended command allows host systems to have the same capabilities as wireless stations using the Native data stream to set bar code parameters and scan.

By inserting characters “#S” in the display buffer at Line 1,

Columns 2 and 3, the host computer tells the wireless station to expect a Bar Code Scanner extended command. Appropriate descriptive characteristics should follow the “#S” characters. The wireless station returns a code that indicates if the command was successful. Then it simulates the

[ENTER] key to return a value to the host computer.

Table 9-8 lists columns in which characters must appear.

Tables on the following pages list characters for each type of bar code. (Line and column references are for a 24-line by

80-column display station.)

The PEN*KEY 6500 Computer supports only the laser bar code scanner.

Table 9-8

Scan Bar Code Parameters

Line 1, Columns 2--3

Column Character Description

2 # Extended command.

3 S Scan Bar Code Parameters command.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-29

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Control Character Byte 1

(Space)

Dots in Table 9-9 indicate the Control Character (CC) Byte

1 options the characters support. (The RT1100, RT1700,

RT5900, and PEN*KEY 6400 Computer’s internal engine do not support CCD 20/20. The PEN*KEY 6400 Computer’s internal engine does not support HP Wand Select.)

Table 9-9

Control Byte 1 Characters

Line 1, Column 4

Options

Byte 1

CCD 20/20

Select

HP Wand

Select

Redundancy Laser

Redundancy

· ·

· · ·

· ·

Disable scanner.

No change from current setting.

9-30 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Control Character Byte 2

The dots in Table 9-10 indicate the CC Byte 2 options the characters support.

Table 9-10

Control Byte 2 Characters

Line 1, Column 5

CC Byte 2

Scan Termination Character

None

[ENTER] key

[TAB] key

Modulo 10

Check Digit

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-31

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Control Character Byte 3

The dots in Table 9-11 indicate the CC Byte 3 options the characters support.

Table 9-11

Control Byte 3 Characters

Line 1, Column 6

Byte 3

Enable

Stream

Scanning Reserved

Options

Return Bar

Code Type

2 ·

4 ·

· ·

8 ·

· ·

(Space)

· · ·

Bar Code

Concatenated

No change from current setting.

9-32 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Bar Code Length

Bar Code Length sets the minimum and maximum character lengths for all types of bar codes scanned (Table 9-12).

Setting the minimum and maximum values to their optimum can increase scanning performance. If the wireless station scans bar codes that are outside the minimum and maximum value, the wireless station ignores the bar code.

Table 9-12

Bar Code Length

Line 1, Columns 7--10

Column Character Description

7--8

9--10

(Spaces)

Bar code length. Maximum length is 99.

No change from current setting.

Bar code length. Minimum length is 00.

No change from current setting.

UPC

Use the UPC command to select the combinations of characters listed in Table 9-13. (The PEN*KEY 6400 Computer’s internal engine does not support UPC-E Number System 1.)

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-33

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Character

(Space)

UPC-E #

System 1

Table 9-13

UPC Bar Code Characters

Options

Expand UPC-E to UPC-A

UPC-E #

System 0 Add-ons UPC-A

Disables all.

· ·

No change from current setting.

EAN Algorithms

Use EAN Algorithms to select combinations of EAN options

(Table 9-14).

9-34 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Table 9-14

EAN Algorithms

Line 1, Column 12

Character Description

0 EAN disabled.

(Space)

EAN with Addons enabled.

EAN enabled.

EAN and EAN with Addons enabled.

No change from current setting.

Code 39

Code 39 (Table 9-15) sets the scanner to read simple Code

39 bar codes that do not include extended or encoded sequences. Extended Code 39 is a superset of Code 39 and scans all regular Code 39 bar codes. You cannot select both

Code 39 and Extended Code 39. Encoded Code 39 combines key presses with normal bar code data.

Encoded Code 39 sequences are described on page 9-43.

Table 9-15

Code 39 Algorithms Characters

Line 1, Column 13

Character Description

0 Code 39 disabled.

(Space)

Encoded Code 39 enabled.

Extended Code 39 enabled.

Code 39 enabled.

No change from current setting.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-35

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Plessey

If the Plessey bar code scanning algorithm is enabled, set its check digits (Table 9-16) according to your requirements.

See the manufacturer’s bar code specifications for more information on check digits.

The dots in Table 9-18 indicate the Plessey check digits the characters support. (The PEN*KEY 6400 Computer’s internal engine does not support Plessey alpha characters.)

Table 9-16

Plessey Characters

Line 1, Column 14

Character Description

0 Plessey disabled.

(Space)

Plessey enabled.

No change from current setting.

Codabar

The Codabar options (Codabar and ABC Codabar) are mutually exclusive coding algorithms and cannot be selected at the same time.

Table 9-17

Codabar Characters

Line 1, Column 16

Character Description

Codabar disabled.

Codabar enabled.

(Space)

ABC Codabar enabled.

No change from current setting.

9-36 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Table 9-18

Plessey Check Digit Characters

Line 1, Column 15

Keep 2nd

Digit Check

Plessey Check Digit

Do Not

Validate 1st

Check Digit

Keep 1st

Check Digit

Mod 10 1st

Check Digit Character

(Space)

· ·

· · ·

No change from current setting.

Mod 11 1st

Check Digit

Code 11

Table 9-19 lists Code 11 characters. (The PEN*KEY 6400

Computer’s internal engine does not support Code 11.)

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-37

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Table 9-19

Code 11 Characters

Line 1, Column 17

Character Description

0 Code 11 disabled.

(Space)

Code 11 enabled.

No change from current setting.

Code 93

Both Code 39 and Code 128 options can be enabled for scanning. (The PEN*KEY 6400 Computer’s internal engine does not support Code 93.)

Table 9-20

Code 93 Characters

Line 1, Column 18

Character Description

0 Code 93 disabled.

(Space)

Code 93 enabled.

No change from current setting.

Code 128

Table 9-21 lists Code 128 characters.

Table 9-21

Code 128 Characters

Line 1, Column 19

Character Description

0 Code 128 disabled.

(Space)

Code 128 enabled.

No change from current setting.

9-38 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Straight or Computer Identics 2of5

If Straight or Computer Identics bar code is enabled, select the maximum and minimum lengths and 1st and 2nd fixed bar code lengths (Table 9-22). (The PEN*KEY 6400 Computer’s internal engine does not support Straight or Computer Identics 2of5.)

Table 9-22

2of5 Characters

Line 1, Columns 20--28

Column Characters Description

20 0 Straight and Computer Identics 2of5 disabled.

21--22

(Space)

Computer Identics 2of5 enabled.

Straight 2of5 enabled.

No change from current setting.

Maximum length Straight or Computer Identics 2of5. See the manufacturer’s bar code specifications for further information.

23--24

(Spaces)

25--26

27--28

(Spaces)

No change from current setting.

Minimum length Straight or Computer Identics 2of5. See the manufacturer’s bar code specifications for further information.

No change from current setting.

1st fixed bar code length for Straight or Computer Identics 2of5. See the manufacturer’s bar code specifications for further information.

No change from current setting.

2nd fixed bar code length for Straight or Computer Identics 2of5. See the manufacturer’s bar code specifications for further information.

No change from current setting.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-39

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Interleaved 2of5

If Interleaved 2of5 is enabled, select the maximum and minimum lengths and the 1st and 2nd fixed bar code lengths according to your requirements (Table 9-23).

Table 9-23

Interleaved 2of5 Characters

Line 1, Columns 29--37

Column Character Description

29 0 Interleaved 2of5 disabled.

30--31

32--33

34--35

36--37

(Space)

(Spaces)

Interleaved 2of5 enabled.

No change from current setting.

Maximum length Interleaved 2of5.

See the manufacturer’s bar code specifications for further information.

No change from current setting.

Minimum length Interleaved 2of5.

See the manufacturer’s bar code specifications for further information.

No change from current setting.

1st fixed length for Interleaved 2of5

Bar Code. See the manufacturer’s bar code specifications for further information.

No change from current setting.

2nd fixed length for Interleaved 2of5

Bar Code. See the manufacturer’s bar code specifications for further information.

No change from current setting.

9-40 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Return Codes for Scan Bar Code

Parameters

The Scan Bar Code Parameters return code is the status sent to the host computer; the code indicates if the extended command was successful. The wireless station returns data and the extended command’s status to the host computer in the following format:

\\X<CR> where “X” is the return code listed in the following chart.

The wireless station simulates the [ENTER] key to return a value to the host computer. If a hexadecimal number is entered wrong, the return code defaults to “0.”

Code Description

0 Good status, transaction complete.

1 Bad status, transaction incomplete.

Example of Scan Bar Code

Parameters

The following example and chart show data for Scan Bar

Code Parameters. A “b” indicates a space.

Column 1 Column 11 Column 23 Column 36 b#S07F32012211120012080108080bbbbbbbb

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-41

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Column Character Description

21--22

23--24

25--26

27--28

30--31

32--33

34--35

36--37

7--8

9--10

(Space)

(Spaces)

This column typically contains a space.

Extended command.

Scan Bar Code Parameter command.

No Control Byte 1 options are returned.

[ENTER] key terminates all scans,

12-volt laser is enabled, Modulo 10

Check Digit.

Barcode type is returned and concatenated.

Maximum length is 32 characters.

Minimum length is 1 character.

Decode UPC System 0.

EAN is enabled.

Encoded code 39 is enabled.

Plessey is enabled.

Mod 10 first digit is checked.

ABC Codabar is enabled.

Code 11 is disabled.

Code 93 is disabled.

Code 128 is enabled.

Straight 2of5 is enabled.

Straight 2of5 maximum length is 8.

Straight 2of5 minimum length is 1.

Straight 2of5 1st fixed length is 8.

Straight 2of5 2nd fixed length is 8.

Interleaved 2of5 is disabled.

No change from current setting.

9-42 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Encoded Code 39

Encoded Code 39 combines key presses with normal bar code data. All regular Code 39 bar codes can be scanned when using Encoded Code 39. “Encoded” refers to special character sequences contained within a standard Code 39 bar code that the wireless station scanning program converts into key presses. This feature allows bar codes to contain commonly-used key press sequences that accompany scanning.

An example is a bar code with a forward tab character encoded at the end of it. When the wireless station operator scans the bar code, the wireless station fills in bar code data and automatically performs a forward tab. This moves the cursor to the next field. The operator does not need to press a key between scans.

Table 9-24 lists escape characters and key press sequences for Encoded Code 39. The “(t)” in the table indicates a terminating key. Any bar code data following this key code is ignored. The “t” sequences, therefore, should be located only at the end of the bar code.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-43

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Sequence

Table 9-24

Key Press Sequences for Encoded Code 39

Key

New Line

Del

Forward Tab

Reverse Tab

Roll - (Roll up/Page down)

Roll ¯ (Roll down/Page up)

Backspace

Field+

Field--

Insert

Home

Enter/Rec Adv (t)

Field Exit

Erase Input

Attn

F1 (t)

F2 (t)

F3 (t)

F4 (t)

F5 (t)

F6 (t)

F7 (t)

F8 (t)

F9 (t)

F10 (t)

9-44 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Sequence

Table 9-24 (Continued)

Key Press Sequences for Encoded Code 39

Key

Clear

F11 (t)

F12 (t)

Error Reset

Help

; (semicolon)

< (less than)

= (equal)

> (greater than)

? (question mark)

(not symbol)

\ (backslash)

¢ (cent)

| (piping symbol)

_ (underscore)

{ (left brace)

| (vertical bar)

} (right brace)

~ (tilde)

Del

Dup

@ (at)

‘ (grave accent)

Sys Req

F13 (t)

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-45

SECTION 9

Extended Commands w x u v y z s t q r o p m n l k j i f g d e h b c

Key a

Sequence

Table 9-24 (Continued)

Key Press Sequences for Encoded Code 39

9-46 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Sequence

Table 9-24 (Continued)

Key Press Sequences for Encoded Code 39

Key

! (exclamation mark)

” (double quote)

$ (dollar)

# (pound)

% (percent)

& (ampersand)

’ (single quote)

( (left parenthesis)

) (right parenthesis)

* (asterisk)

+ (plus)

, (comma)

-- (minus)

F14 (t)

/ (forward slash)

F15 (t)

F16 (t)

F17 (t)

F18 (t)

F19 (t)

F20 (t)

F21 (t)

F22 (t)

F23 (t)

F24 (t)

: (colon)

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-47

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Terminating Keys

Terminating keys are the nonprintable ASCII sequences and action keys. When the wireless station encounters them in a bar code, an action is taken, and the wireless station sends the data in the buffer to the host computer. Terminating keys should appear only at the end of the bar code. If they are located in the middle of a bar code, they are executed normally, but the data following them in the bar code is ignored. Terminating keys cause a wireless stationto-base station transmission. The wireless station ignores data in the bar code buffer following these keys once a transmission takes place.

For example, the wireless station interprets this sequence:

123$V456 as

123F6

The wireless station will not send “456” to the host computer, because it follows terminating key F6.

ASCII sequences can be used any time before a terminating key. For example, the wireless station interprets

+H+E+L+L+O$M as hello<Enter>

9-48 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

" NOTE:

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Escape Characters

The four escape characters in Table 9-24 yield a 5250 data stream key press equivalent when followed by another character. The escape characters are:

$ (dollar)

% (percent)

+ (plus)

/ (forward slash)

For example:

If a bar code contains the sequence “%M” somewhere within it, the wireless station converts this sequence to an [ENTER] key and processes it as soon as encountered in the scanning buffer.

“+B” is converted to the lower case “b.”

“%B” is converted to an F11 key press.

If you want the Encoded Code 39 option but the bar codes to be scanned already contain the “$,” “%,” “+,” or “/,” character, then each place where these characters occur must be expanded to a special

“/” sequence:

Every bar code where the “$” is maintained must be expanded to a “/C” sequence.

Percent signs (%) must be expanded to “/E”.

Forward slashes (/) must be expanded to the letter “/O”.

Plus signs (+) must be expanded to “/K”.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide 9-49

SECTION 9

Extended Commands

Concatenation

When Encoded Code 39 is enabled, all bar codes are concatenated. This allows several separate bar code scans to be strung together into one input field. This feature is especially useful when using separate Encoded Code 39 bar codes to replace operator key presses.

For example, if the bar code “1234” is scanned followed by the scanning of a separate “$C” bar code, the wireless station keeps the “1234” in the starting field and tabs to the next unprotected field. If concatenation was not automatically enabled, the “1234” bar code would be cleared out due to the second scan. Then the wireless station would tab to the next unprotected field.

Enabling Encoded Code 39 also allows scanning to occur when the cursor is in a protected field. This feature is provided to allow scanning of cursor movement functions (such as forward tab and reverse tab) while in a protected location on the screen. Scanning alphanumeric codes in a protected field causes an error tone for each character scanned.

9-50 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

Appendix A

Bar Code Scanning

" " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " "

Overview

Collecting and decoding bar code data are built-in features of the radio data network. The wireless station is programmed to support a variety of bar code scanning devices and decode all major bar code types.

Specific bar code algorithms are enabled either by scanner orders from the host computer, or by the wireless station operator utilizing the set-up menus. Once a bar code is correctly decoded by the wireless station, the data can be encoded with descriptive information about the decoded symbol.

Unique ASCII command codes are employed by the wireless station to enable certain types of bar code algorithms and to format bar code data for return to the host computer. You can improve response time for the radio data network by knowing the bar codes you use and limiting the wireless station to only those codes.

This appendix contains general information and reference data pertaining to enabling bar code algorithms and interpreting bar code data.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide A-1

APPENDIX A

Bar Code Scanning

How to Enable Algorithms

To maximize wireless station and network performance, it is recommended that you enable only the bar code types required by your radio data network and host application software. For obvious reasons, the more bar code algorithms enabled in the wireless station, the slower the response time.

You can enable bar codes is one of three ways. The first two options require the cursor to be in an input field before the operator attempts the scan.

1. Select the “scan all fields” option from the wireless station’s set-up menu. This allows the operator to use the scanner as the input device for any field requiring input.

2. If “scan all fields” in not selected, the host program can enable scanning on a field-by-field basis by enabling the magnetic stripe reader (MSR) input for each scannable field. The MSR capability is sometimes referred to as OID (operator identification) in IBM documents.

3. Select the “Encoded Code 39” option from the wireless station’s set-up menus. Since Encoded Code 39 bar codes allow the operator to scan bar codes to simulate keyboard input, the scanner is always enabled. This option overrides the “scan all fields” option. This also enables the scanner even if the cursor is not located in an input field.

To make a field “scan only” (prevent keyboard input) you can define the field as an I/O only field (for example, magnetic stripe reader). This is sometimes referred to as “keyboard shift, inhibit keyboard entry” in IBM documents.

A-2 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

APPENDIX A

Bar Code Scanning

How Scanning Works

When scanning is enabled, data from the scanner is placed in the input field where the cursor is. If the cursor is not in an input field the scanner is not enabled. (Encoded Code 39 is one exception explained later.) If the cursor is not at the first position of the input field, the wireless station moves it there before the data is written to the field.

When the bar code data is longer than the current input field, the wireless station’s response depends on the “stream scan” option in the set-up menus.

When stream scan is disabled, the data remaining after the field is filled is ignored.

When stream scan is enabled, any data remaining after the first field is filled is written to the next input field or fields. If a non-scannable field is encountered, any remaining bar code data is ignored. Whenever an auto-enter field is encountered, an [ENTER] key is simulated when the field is full and any remaining bar code data is ignored.

If the bar code data does not fill the input field, a

[FIELD EXIT] key is simulated to clear to the end of field and move the cursor to the next input field. If the field is an auto-enter field, an [ENTER] key is simulated to send data to the host computer.

The Encoded Code 39 Exception

The preceding paragraphs about “how scanning works” mention an exception for Encoded Code 39. Encoded Code

39 allows the bar code symbol to contain certain “escape sequences” that can override the wireless station set-up just explained.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide A-3

APPENDIX A

Bar Code Scanning

These escape sequences enable the data in the bar code to force some actions that would otherwise require the operator to press a key. For example, terminating a scan and transmitting it to the host computer or forcing a tab to the next scannable field. When these commands are included in the bar code data they override the set-up conditions of the wireless station.

Implementation of Encoded Code 39 for the 5250 data stream is nearly identical with the 3270 data stream. The exceptions include some “escape sequences.” For full details of these changes refer to bar code parameters for Encoded

Code 39 in Section 9, “Extended Commands.”

How Stream Scan Works

Stream scan controls how the wireless station handles input from the scanner when the number of characters in the bar code is not the same as the input field. When scanning is enabled, data from the scanner is placed into the field where the cursor is located. If the cursor is not in an input field, the scanner is not enabled (Encoded Code 39 is an exception). If the cursor is not at the first position of the input field, it is moved there automatically before the data is written to the field. Whenever the wireless station encounters an auto-enter field, it generates an [ENTER] key at the end of the field and any remaining bar code data is ignored.

A-4 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

APPENDIX A

Bar Code Scanning

With stream scan enabled, the wireless station fills the first input field, then writes the remaining characters into the next field(s). When the wireless station encounters a nonscanning field, any remaining bar code data is ignored.

When the bar code does not fill the input field, a

[FIELD EXIT] key is generated to clear to the end of the field and move the cursor to the next input field. If the field in an auto-enter field, an [ENTER] key is automatically generated to send the data to the host computer.

How Scan All Fields Works

Scan all fields allows the operator to use the scanner for input any time the cursor is in an input field. This option, the most common one used, enables scanner input without requiring commands from the host.

How to Scan Individual Fields

If you prefer to enable scanning on a field-by-field basis, enable the magnetic stripe reader (MSR) input for each scannable field. A portion of the command for the input field specifies scanner input. The MSR capability is sometimes referred to in IBM documents as OID. See Section 9,

“Extended Commands,” for information about the bar code scanning command.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide A-5

APPENDIX A

Bar Code Scanning

What Scan Ahead Allows

The scan-ahead feature works much like the type-ahead feature on some IBM terminal products. It lets the operator scan one bar code before the next input screen is available from the host computer. This improves response time in scanning applications by allowing the operator to keep one step ahead of the host computer.

How the Host Gets Bar Codes

The wireless station can encode descriptive information along with bar code data returned to the host computer.

This encoded information indicates the type of bar code scanned and, in some instances, the length of the bar code data. Also included in the format may be check digits, start and stop digits, system digits, add-on code digits and flags.

Bar code data streams can begin with the the bar code type followed by the bar code data. Table A-1 details the bar code types and the format of the bar code data string. Refer to the wireless station’s user guide for the bar code types that the wireless station supports.

A-6 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

APPENDIX A

Bar Code Scanning

;

Type Code Data Bar Code Type

0 UPC short

EAN short

UPC long

EAN long

UPC short add-on 2

EAN short add-on 2

UPC long add-on 2

EAN long add-on 2

UPC short add-on 5

EAN short add-on 5

UPC long add-on 5

EAN long add-on 5

Interleaved 2 of 5

Straight 2 of 5 ***

Computer Identics 2 of 5 ***

Plessey

CODABAR

ABC CODABAR ***

Code 11 ***

Code 39

Extended Code 39

Code 93 ***

Code 128

* Bar code data definitions:

Table A-1

Bar Code Data String Formats

Data Format* nddddddc fndddddc nddddddddddc fnddddddddddc nddddddcaa fndddddcaa nddddddddddcaa fnddddddddddcaa nddddddcaaaaa fndddddcaaaaa nddddddddddcaaaaa fnddddddddddcaaaaa d......d

d......d

d......dc

sd......ds

d......d

Data Length**

1 to 31

2 to 31

3 to 31

6 to 31

1 to 31

1 to 31 s = Start and stop digits

** If MOD 10 or MOD11 check digits are enabled, the digit falls at the end of a bar code data string. Each check digit enabled extends the length of the bar code data string by

1 character.

*** Not supported by PEN*KEY 6400 Computer’s internal engine.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide A-7

APPENDIX A

Bar Code Scanning

A-8 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

Appendix B

Conversion Tables

" " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " "

Decimal Hex

Decimal to Hexadecimal

Following are decimal and hexadecimal values for nondisplayable ASCII and displayable graphic characters.

Char.

DLE

NUL

SOH

STX

ETX

EOT

ENQ

ACK

BEL

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

NAK

SYN

ETB

CAN

Decimal Hex

Char.

’

)

(

SUB

ESC

Decimal Hex

Char.

;

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide B-1

APPENDIX B

Conversion Tables

Hex

Decimal

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

Char.

d e b c

‘ a

] f g h j i

[

Hex

Decimal

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

118

119

120

121

122

123

112

113

114

115

116

117

107

108

109

110

111

IND

NEL

SSA

ESA

HTS

HTJ

VTS

Char.

x y z

{ v w r s t u p q

}

DEL m n o k l

Hex

Decimal

156

157

158

159

160

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

150

151

152

153

154

155

144

145

146

147

148

149

139

140

141

142

143

Char.

PLD

PLU

SS2

SS3

DCS

PU1

PU2

STS

CCH

SPA

EPA

CSI

OSC

APC

B-2 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

APPENDIX B

Conversion Tables

Hex

Decimal

182

183

184

185

186

187

176

177

178

179

180

181

171

172

173

174

175

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

Char.

« d

Hex

Decimal

211

212

213

214

215

216

205

206

207

208

209

210

200

201

202

203

204

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

Char.

Hex

Decimal

240

241

242

243

244

245

234

235

236

237

238

239

229

230

231

232

233

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

Char.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide B-3

APPENDIX B

Conversion Tables

Binary to EBCDIC

Following are binary to EBCDIC conversion values.

Bits 0--5 EBCDIC Code

01 0000

01 0001

01 0010

01 0011

01 0100

01 0101

01 0110

01 0111

01 1000

01 1001

01 1010

01 1011

01 1100

01 1101

01 1110

01 1111

00 0000

00 0001

00 0010

00 0011

00 0100

00 0101

00 0110

00 0111

00 1000

00 1001

00 1010

00 1011

00 1100

00 1101

00 1110

00 1111

Display Graphic

;

)

(

<space>

Bits 0--5 EBCDIC Code Display Graphic

11 0000

11 0001

11 0010

11 0011

11 0100

11 0101

11 0110

11 0111

11 1000

11 1001

11 1010

11 1011

11 1100

11 1101

11 1110

11 1111

10 0000

10 0001

10 0010

10 0011

10 0100

10 0101

10 0110

10 0111

10 1000

10 1001

10 1010

10 1011

10 1100

10 1101

10 1110

10 1111

”

’

EBCDIC

—

B-4 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

Appendix C

System/36 Line Generations

" " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " "

Overview

This appendix contains an example of interactive line generation for an IBM System/36 host computer.

Line Generations

The following pages are line configuration guides. The images are screen prints made after each appropriate field on a screen has been completed. The member name

“Norand” is a variable you name. You can use any name that is suitable.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide C-1

APPENDIX C

System/36 Line Generations

MAIN

Main System/36 help menu

Select one of the following:

1. Display a user menu

2. Perform general system activities

3. Use and control printers, diskettes, or tape

4. Work with files, libraries, or folders

5. Use programming languages and utilities

6. Communicate with another system or user

7. Define the system and its users

8. Use problem determination and service

9. Use office products

10. Sign off the system

Cmd3-Previous menu

Home-Sign on menu

Cmd7-End

Ready for option number or command

CNFIGSSP

Cmd12-How to use help

C-2 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

APPENDIX C

System/36 Line Generations

1.0

CNFIGSSP MAIN MENU

Select one of the following:

1. How to use CNFIGSSP

2. Create, change, or delete a configuration member

3. Review a configuration

4. Print a configuration

10. Configuration support aids

12. Apply change to the master configuration record

13. Rebuild the master configuration record (update to next release)

14. End CNFIGSSP

Option: 2

Cmd3-Previous menu

Help text is available throughout the CNFIGSSP procedure by pressing the help key

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide C-3

APPENDIX C

System/36 Line Generations

3.0

CONFIGURATION MEMBER DEFINITION

Select one of the following:

1. Change an existing configuration member

2. Create a new configuration member

3. Delete a configuration member

Option .

Member name .

NORAND

Library name .

.#CNFGLIB

Cmd3-Previous menu

C-4 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

APPENDIX C

System/36 Line Generations

CONFIGURATION MEMBER DESCRIPTION NORAND W3 6.0

1. Describe the configuration member (up to 60 characters):

Norand

2. Specify main storage size in K-bytes .

. 0128-7168 1024

3. Specify disk storage size in M-bytes .

. 0030-1432 0133

Cmd3-Previous menu

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide C-5

APPENDIX C

System/36 Line Generations

5.0

CONFIGURATION MEMBER MENU NORAND W3

Select one of the following:

1. Work with display stations and printers

2. Add or delete program products, optional SSP, and features

3. Define base SSP values

4. Specify sizes for disk VTOC, history file, and task work area

If no more changes are to be made to your configuration member select the following option:

5. Save configuration member and return to main menu for

CNFIGSSP

Option: 1

Cmd3-Previous menu Cmd19-Cancel

C-6 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

APPENDIX C

System/36 Line Generations

10.0

CNFIGSSP - COMMUNICATIONS LINE DEFINITION

FOR REMOTE WORK STATIONS

NORAND W3

The following lines have been defined: 1

1. Which line is being defined? .

1-10

" NOTE:

The line being defined is the physical port on the host computer to which the controller is attached.

Cmd3-Previous menu Cmd9-Drop line Cmd19-Cancel

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide C-7

APPENDIX C

System/36 Line Generations

10.0

CNFIGSSP - COMMUNICATIONS LINE DEFINITION

FOR REMOTE WORK STATIONS

NORAND W3

The following lines have been defined: 1

1. Which line is being defined?

1-10 1

2. What type of line is it?

1-Nonswitched 2-Switched manual call

3-Switched autoanswer

5-X.21 short-hold mode

4-Switched manual answer

6-IBM Token-Ring Network

3. Automatic reconnect for the line?

Y,N Y

4. If line is X.25, enter X.25 member name .

Cmd3-Previous menu Cmd9-Drop line Cmd19-Cancel

C-8 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

APPENDIX C

System/36 Line Generations

27.0

CONFIGURATION - DISPLAY STATION AND PRINTER MENU NORAND W3

Select one of the following:

1. Add or delete local display stations and printers

2. Add or delete remote line characteristics

3. Add or delete remote controllers, display stations, and printers

4. Assign default printers to display stations

5. Assign display station control (subconsoles) for printers

6. Change display station or printer work station IDs

7. Change display station or printer characteristics

8. Select the system printer

9. Add remote service device definition

10. Delete remote service device definition

11. Return to previous menu

Option: 3

Cmd3-Previous menu Cmd19-Cancel

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide C-9

APPENDIX C

System/36 Line Generations

13.0

CNFIGSSP - REMOTE CONTROLLER DEFINITION

ADD Controller:

NORAND

C01

1. Describe the remote controller .

L15394

2. Controller type .

1. 5251 Model 12 2. 5294 3. 3274

3. Controller station address .

. 01-FD 01

" NOTE: The controller station address must match the controller’s SDLC address.

4. Communications line .

1-10 1

5. For a switched line, optionally specify

1 to 3 alternative lines .

Cmd2-Scan

Cmd6-Restart

Cmd3-Previous menu

C-10 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

APPENDIX C

System/36 Line Generations

12.0

CNFIGSSP - WORK STATION DEFINITION REMOTE NORAND W3

Specify the arrangement of your display stations and printers.

The positions correspond to the work station address.

Displays: 01. 5251 Model 11 02. 5251 Model 12 10. 5291

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

10 10 10 10 10

<--Work station address

0 -- P J ------ J

1 -- O J C01 J

2 -- R J J

3 -- T J 5294 J

J ------ J

Cmd3-Previous menu Cmd5-Display device codes Cmd19-Cancel

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide C-11

APPENDIX C

System/36 Line Generations

5.0

CONFIGURATION MEMBER MENU

Select one of the following:

NORAND W3

1. Work with display stations and printers

2. Add or delete program products, optional SSP, and features

3. Define base SSP values

4. Specify sizes for disk VTOC, history file, and task work area

If no more changes are to be made to your configuration member select the following option:

5. Save configuration member and return to main menu for

CNFIGSSP

Option: 5

Cmd3-Previous menu Cmd19-Cancel

C-12 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

APPENDIX C

System/36 Line Generations

W3 1.0

CNFIGSSP - MAIN MENU

Select one of the following:

1. How to use CNFIGSSP

2. Create, change, or delete a configuration member

3. Review a configuration

4. Print a configuration

10. Configuration support aids

12. Apply change to the master configuration record

13. Rebuild the master configuration record (update to next release)

14. End CNFIGSSP

Option: 12

Cmd3-Previous menu

Configuration member has been saved.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide C-13

APPENDIX C

System/36 Line Generations

3.0

CONFIGURATION MEMBER DEFINITION W3

Member name .

Library name .

NORAND

#CNFGLIB

Cmd3-Previous menu

C-14 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

APPENDIX C

System/36 Line Generations

7.0

CNFIGSSP - CHANGE MASTER CONFIGURATION NORAND W3

Specify area to be updated .

. 3

1. Entire configuration

2. Additional programming support

3. Display stations and printers

4. Base SSP values and system area sizes

" NOTE: Exiting from this screen causes an initial program load (IPL).

Cmd3-Previous menu

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide C-15

APPENDIX C

System/36 Line Generations

MAIN

Main System/36 help menu

Select one of the following:

1. Display a user menu

2. Perform general system activities

3. Use and control printers, diskettes, or tape

4. Work with files, libraries, or folders

5. Use programming languages and utilities

6. Communicate with another system or user

7. Define the system and its users

8. Use problem determination and service

9. User office products

10. Sign off the system

Cmd3-Previous menu

Home-Sign on menu

Cmd7-End

Ready for option number or command

SETCOMM

Cmd12-How to use help

COPR IBM Corp. 1985

C-16 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

APPENDIX C

System/36 Line Generations

SETCOMM PROCEDURE Optional-*

Sets the communications configuration parameters

Line number .

1-10

Line type .

.SHM,MULTCONT,MULTTRIB,NONSWTCH,SWITCHED

Use system clocking facility .

CLOCK,NOCLOCK

NRZI data encoding .

. NRZI,NONRZI

Use continuous carrier feature .

CONCAR,NONNONCAR

Use non-U.S. answer tone .

. TONE,NOTONE

Use autocall separator characters .

. SEP,NOSEP

Use autocall end-of-number characters .

.EON,NOEON

Primary SDLC time-out value .

. 05-80

Number of primary SDLC error retries .

1-5

Modem .

IBMLPDA,IBMWRAP,NONIBM

X.25 support .

.X25,NOX25

DDSA line speed .

.2400BPS,4800BPS,9600BPS,56KBPS

Secondary SDLC inactivity time-out value .

0-20

IBM Token-Ring Network adapter address override .

. 400000000000 - 7FFFFFFFFFFF,R

Cmd3-Previous menu

COPR IBM Corp. 1987

NONSWTCH *

NOCLOCK *

NONRZI *

" NOTE:

Use NONSWTCH when defining up to 8 LUs (radio terminals) for the controller emulating a 5294 Control Unit. Use MULTCONT or MULT-

TRIB when defining two or more SDLC addresses for the controller.

The NRZI data encoding setting must match the controller’s NRZI setting.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide C-17

APPENDIX C

System/36 Line Generations

C-18 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

Appendix D

System/38 Line Generations

" " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " "

Overview

This appendix contains an example of interactive line generation for an IBM System/38 host computer. The images are screen prints made after each appropriate field on a screen has been completed.

The page and sequence number for line, control, and device descriptions are listed on the next page.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide D-1

APPENDIX D

System/38 Line Generations

Subject

Line

Control

Device

Page Number

Sequence Number

SEQNBR*...+...1...+...2...+...3...+...4...+...5...+...6...+

/01/07/98 16:02:57 LINE DESCRIPTION

Status- ACTIVE

Line description name-

OU number of line port-

Line type-

Connection type-

LIND

LINNBR

TYPE

CNN

L63SPP

*SDLCP

*PP

" NOTE:

Data rate-

Set the connection type to PP (point to point) when defining only one physical controller. Use MP (multipoint) for two or more SDLC addresses.

Switched network backup-

Activate swt network backup-

Speed select feature

RATE

SWNBKU

ACTSWNBKU

SELECT

009600

*NO

*YES

NRZI decodingNONRTNZ *NO

" NOTE: The setting for NRZI decoding must match the NRZI setting for the controller.

S/38 provided clockCLOCK *NO

D-2 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

APPENDIX D

System/38 Line Generations

01/07/98 15:40:40

Autocall feature-

Autoanswer

S/38 answer tone feature-

Wire link type-

Data comm equipment group-

Non-IBM modem-

Switched connection type-

CONTROL UNIT DESCRIPTION

AUTOCALL *NO

AUTOANS

ANSTONE

*NO

WIRE

DCEGRP

OEMMDM

SWTCNN

4 2

*YES

Speed rate type-

Dial mode-

Answer mode-

Data terminal ready delay-

Idle detection time-

BSC receive timeout timer-

Nonproductive receive time-

Number of error retries-

RATETYPE

DIALMODE

ANSMODE

DTRDLY

IDLETIME

RCVTMR

NONPRDRCV 000

RETRY 0001

ONLINE *YES

*FULL

*MANUAL

0000

Online at CPF start-

Attached switched control unit-

Attached nonswitched ctrl units-

BSC switched control units-

S/38 station address-

S/38 exchange identifier

Line code-

CTLU

SWTCTLU

STNADR

EXCHID

CODE

C163SS6A

02249EF3

*EBCDIC

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide D-3

APPENDIX D

System/38 Line Generations

Remote job entry-

BSC switched line disconnect-

3270 emulation mode-

X.25 Network Type-

X.25 Network local address-

X.25 Default packet size-

X.25 Maximum packet size-

X.25 Default window size-

X.25 Maximum PIU size-

Text description

Store System, Norand 5250

RJE

BSCSWTDSC

EML3270

X25NETTYPE

LCLNETADR

DFTPKTSIZE

MAXPKTSIZE

DFTWDWSIZE

NETMAXPIU

TEXT

D-4 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

APPENDIX D

System/38 Line Generations

01/07/98 15:40:40

Status- ACTIVE

CONTROL UNIT DESCRIPTION

Devices varied on- 001

Control unit description name-

Devices active- 001

CUD C163SS6A

Control unit type-

Model number-

Control unit address-

Switched line-

TYPE

MODEL

CTLADR

SWITCHED

5294

001

6A63

*NO

Nonswitched line name-

Speed select feature-

Telephone number-

LINE

SELECT

TELNBR

L63SPP

*NO

*NONE

Switched initial connection-

Exchange identifier-

INLCNN

EXCHID 0450006A

" NOTE: 6A is the SDLC address. The exchange identifier applies only to switched-line environments.

BSC local identifierLCLID

BSC remote identifierRMTID

SSCP identifier-

SSCP identifier checking-

Online at CPF start-

Current switched line-

Switched network backup

Activate swt network backup-

Allow delayed connection-

SSCPID

SSCPIDCHK

ONLINE

SWNBKU

ACTSWNBKU

DLYFEAT

*YES

*NO

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide D-5

APPENDIX D

System/38 Line Generations

01/07/98 15:40:40

Attached device names-

R94HH4400

CONTROL UNIT DESCRIPTION

R94HH4401

BSC device delay in sec-

BSC program delay in sec-

Remote job entry-

Remote job entry host-

Host system signon/logon text-

DEV

DEVDLY

PGMDLY

RJE

RJEHOST

RJELOGON

3270 emulation mode-

Maximum length PIU-

Data compress/decompress-

Device wait timeout value-

Link type-

Controller code-

X.25 address

X.25 packet size-

X.25 window size-

X.25 LCC protocol-

X.25 response time-

X.25 reverse charging-

Incoming calls-

Outgoing calls-

X.25 closed usergroup ID-

X.25 connection password-

X.25 user facilities

NETCUGID

NETCNNPWD

NETUSRFCL

D-6 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

EML3270

MAXLENPIU

DTACPR

DEVWAIT

LINKTYPE

CODE

X25ADR

DFTPKTSIZE

DFTWDWSIZE

NETPCL

NETRSPTMR

NETRVSCRG

120

*SDLCSEC

01/07/98 15:40:40

Text description-

NORAND

APPENDIX D

System/38 Line Generations

CONTROL UNIT DESCRIPTION

TEXT

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide D-7

APPENDIX D

System/38 Line Generations

01/07/98 15:40:40

Status- ACTIVE

Device description name-

Device address-

Drop line at sign off-

Associated work stn printer-

Associated message queue-

Library name-

DEVICE DESCRIPTION

Device type code-

Model number-

Control unit description name-

Online at CPF start-

DEVD

DEVADR

DEVTYPE

MODEL

CTLU

ONLINE

DROP

PRINTER

MSGQ

Print image name-

Library name-

Printer device file name-

Library name-

PRTIMG

PRTFILE

R94HH4400

006A63

5291

001

C163SS6A

*NO

*YES

*NONE

QSYSPRT

*LIBL

D-8 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

APPENDIX D

System/38 Line Generations

01/07/98 15:40:40 DEVICE DESCRIPTION

Work stn controller addressWSCADR

Work stn controller keyboard-

Allow blinking cursor-

WSCKBD

ALWBLN

BSC contention resolution

Local LU name-

Remote LU name-

Secure LU-

CONTN

LCLLU

RMTLU

SECURELU

Printer font-

Feed mode-

3270 emulation device type-

3270 emulation keyboard type-

Maximum length RU-

Auxiliary device-

(No auxiliary devices)

Network device address-

FONT

FORMFEED

EMLDEVTYP

EMLKBDTYP

MAXLENRU

AUXDEV

NETDEVADR

CHRID Character identifier-

Graphic character set-

Code page-

Text description-

Norand 5250

TEXT

*YES

*SYSVAL

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide D-9

APPENDIX D

System/38 Line Generations

01/07/98 15:40:40

Status- ACTIVE

Device description name-

Device address-

Drop line at sign off-

Associated work stn printer-

Associated message queue-

Library name-

DEVICE DESCRIPTION

Device type code-

Model number-

Control unit description name-

Online at CPF start-

DEVD

DEVADR

DEVTYPE

MODEL

CTLU

ONLINE

DROP

PRINTER

MSGQ

Print image name-

Library name-

Printer device file name-

Library name-

PRTIMG

PRTFILE

R94HH4401

016A63

5291

001

C163SS6A

*NO

*YES

*NONE

QSYSPRT

*LIBL

D-10 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

APPENDIX D

System/38 Line Generations

01/07/98 15:40:40 DEVICE DESCRIPTION

Work stn controller addressWSCADR

Work stn controller keyboard-

Allow blinking cursor-

WSCKBD

ALWBLN

BSC contention resolution

Local LU name-

Remote LU name-

Secure LU-

CONTN

LCLLU

RMTLU

SECURELU

Printer font-

Feed mode-

3270 emulation device type-

3270 emulation keyboard type-

Maximum length RU-

Auxiliary device-

(No auxiliary devices)

Network device address-

FONT

FORMFEED

EMLDEVTYP

EMLKBDTYP

MAXLENRU

AUXDEV

NETDEVADR

CHRID Character identifier-

Graphic character set-

Code page-

Text description-

Norand 5250

TEXT

*YES

*SYSVAL

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide D-11

APPENDIX D

System/38 Line Generations

01/07/98 15:40:40 DEVICE DESCRIPTION

***** END OF SOURCE *****

D-12 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

Appendix E

AS/400 Line Generations

" " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " "

Overview

This appendix contains these examples:

Multipoint line configuration example

5394 description example

Device description example

Sample configuration for an RC3250 Controller

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide E-1

APPENDIX E

AS/400 Line Generations

Multipoint Line Configuration Example

The next page shows an example of a multipoint line configuration running an RS-232/V24 interface from the AS/400.

The left column is the description of the parameter.

The “>“ symbol means this value was changed from the default value supplied by IBM.

The far right column shows the possible values for the parameter. When the dots continue past the last entry, this means there are more values for this parameter than can fit on the display. To display the remaining values and a short description, place a “?” in the first position of the field and press enter.

The following chart contains helpful comments about some parameters.

Parameter Comments

Resource name You need to supply the resource name. The name varies with each system installed.

Data link role The setting must be *PRI (primary).

Connection type The type can be *NONSWTPP if you wish.

This will limit you to only 16 LUs without changing the line description. There is no advantage to making the line a

*NONSWTPP; the AS/400 will allocate the same amount of resources.

NRZI

Maximum frame size

The setting for NRZI must match the parameter set for the controller.

Disabled = *NO and Enabled = *YES.

The maximum frame size should be 521.

The line description works at the data link level, so this will include the 4 bytes of

SDLC information.

E-2 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

APPENDIX E

AS/400 Line Generations

A similar device description must be provided for each radio terminal. Comments on specific screen lines are in the following chart.

Line Description

3 The name following “LIND” uniquely describes the line and enables links to it from “CRTCTLRWS” and

“CRTDEVDSP.” Note the same number appearing after

“CTLD” in line 16, “LINE” in line 18, and “CTL” in lines

24 and 28.

3 The name following “RSRCNAME” names the physical line.

The number following “EXCHID” specifies the device type and serial number for the host computer.

“MAXFRAMES” can be “521” or “261,” but must match the number set on the controller.

The number following “CTLD” links the controller to the line defined beginning with line 3.

The number following “LINE” links the controller to the line defined beginning with line 3.

The number following “STNADR” is a number assigned by the programmer.

The number following “DEVD” links the device to the controller defined beginning with line 3.

The number following “CTL” links the device to the controller defined beginning with line 3.

“LOCADR” is the unique local address for the device.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide E-3

APPENDIX E

AS/400 Line Generations

MAIN AS/400 Main Menu

Select one of the following:

System: S1010535

1. User tasks

2. Office tasks

3. General system tasks

4. Files, libraries, and folders

5. Programming

6. Communications

7. Define or change the system

8. Problem handling

9. Display a menu

10. User support and education

11. PC Support tasks

90. Sign off

Selection or command

===> crtlinsdlc

F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=User support

F23=Set initial menu

E-4 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

APPENDIX E

AS/400 Line Generations

" NOTE:

Create Line Desc (SDLC) (CRTLINSDLC)

The line description describes the local system and its link characteristics.

Type choices, press Enter

Line description ...................

> RFLINE

Resource Name ......................

> LIN011

Online at IPL

+ for more values

......................

*YES

Data link role .........

.........

> *PRI

Name

*YES, *NO

*NEG, *PRI, *SEC

Physical interface ................

*RS232V24 *RS232V24, *V35, *X21, ...

Connection type ....................

> *MP *NONSWTPP, SWTPP, *MP, SHM, ...

Switched network backup

Exchange identifier

NRZI data encoding

..........

...............

................

*NO

*SYSGEN

*YES

*YES, *NO

05600000-056FFFFF, *SYSGEN

*YES, *NO

Number of attached controllers ..

Line Speed

Modem type supported

Maximum frame size

Duplex

Idle timer

.........................

..............

................

..............................

Nonproductive receive timer ......

.........................

> 4

> 19200

*NORMAL

521

*HALF

320

1-256

600, 1200, 2400, 4800, ...

*NORMAL, *V35, *IBMWRAP ...

265, 521, 1033, 2057

*HALF, *FULL

160-4200 (0.1 seconds)

5-300 (0.1 seconds)

More ...

F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh

F24=More keys

F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide E-5

APPENDIX E

AS/400 Line Generations

5394 Description Example

" NOTE:

The next page shows an example of a 5394 Control Unit description used on an AS/400.

The left column is the description of the parameter.

The “>“ symbol means this value was changed from the default value supplied by IBM.

Note that the value for “Attached nonswitched line” is the name of the line description entered on page E-5. The controller type is a 5394, but can also be a 5294.

The frame size is the same as on the controller. Also, because the example is connecting to a nonswitched line, the exchange identifier is not required.

A control unit description is required for each SDLC address.

E-6 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

APPENDIX E

AS/400 Line Generations

MAIN AS/400 Main Menu

Select one of the following:

System: S1010535

1. User tasks

2. Office tasks

3. General system tasks

4. Files, libraries, and folders

5. Programming

6. Communications

7. Define or change the system

8. Problem handling

9. Display a menu

10. User support and education

11. PC Support tasks

90. Sign off

Selection or command

===> crtctlrws

F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=User support

F23=Set initial menu

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide E-7

APPENDIX E

AS/400 Line Generations

" NOTE:

Create Ctl Desc (Remote WS) (CRTCTLRWS)

The controller description describes the remote system and its link characteristics. One description is required for each SDLC address.

Type choices, and press Enter.

Controller description ........

> RFCTL01

Controller type ................

> 5394

Controller model

Link type

...............

.......................

Online at IPL

Switched connection

......................

...............

*SDLC

*YES

*NO

Name

3174, 3274, 5251, 5294 ...

0, 1, 0001, 2, 0002, 12, 0012 ...

*IDLC, *LAN, *NONE, *SDLC ...

*YES, *NO

*NO, *YES

Switched network backup ..........

Attached nonswitched line ....

*NO

RFLINE

*NO, *YES

Name

Maximum frame size ............

> 517

Station address ....................

265-1994, 261, 265, 517 ...

Exchange identifier ...............

00100000-FFFFFFFF

01-FE

Text ‘description’ ................

Norand controller address 01

Bottom

F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F10=Additional parameters F12=Cancel

F13=How to use this display F24=More keys

E-8 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

APPENDIX E

AS/400 Line Generations

Device Description Example

" NOTE:

The next page shows an example of a device description used on the AS/400.

The left column is the description of the parameter.

The “>“ symbol means this value was changed from the default value supplied by IBM.

This device description would communicate with radio terminal #0 if it was attached to the first address in the

RC3250 Controller or RC3240 Controller. This is determined by the “Local location address” field in this device description. The address is in hexadecimal form.

The following chart contains helpful comments about some other parameters.

Parameter Comments

Attached controller The “Attached controller” field is the name of the controller that we just created.

Device type The device type is always the same for every device.

Device model The device model is always the same for every device.

One device description is required for each radio terminal.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide E-9

APPENDIX E

AS/400 Line Generations

MAIN AS/400 Main Menu

Select one of the following:

System: S1010535

1. User tasks

2. Office tasks

3. General system tasks

4. Files, libraries, and folders

5. Programming

6. Communications

7. Define or change the system

8. Problem handling

9. Display a menu

10. User support and education

11. PC Support tasks

90. Sign off

Selection or command

===> crtdevdsp

F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=User support

F23=Set initial menu

E-10 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

APPENDIX E

AS/400 Line Generations

Create Device Desc (Display) (CRTDEVDSP)

Type choices, press Enter.

Device description .............

> RFDEV00 Name

Device class ....................

> *RMT *LCL, *RMT, *VRT

Device type .....................

> 5291 3101, 3151, 3161, 3162 ...

Device model ....................

Local location address

Drop line at signoff

Allow blinking cursor

Printer

........

..........

.........

..........................

Text ‘description’ .............

> 1

> 00

> *NO

*YES

Name

*BLANK

0, 1, 2, 4, 11, 12, 23 ...

00-FE

Online at IPL ...................

Attached controller ...........

*YES *YES, *NO

> RFCLT01 Name

*YES, *NO

More...

F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display

F24=More keys

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide E-11

APPENDIX E

AS/400 Line Generations

MAIN AS/400 Main Menu

Select one of the following:

System: S1010535

1. User tasks

2. Office tasks

3. General system tasks

4. Files, libraries, and folders

5. Programming

6. Communications

7. Define or change the system

8. Problem handling

9. Display a menu

10. User support and education

11. PC Support tasks

90. Sign off

Selection or command

===> wrkcfgsts *lin rfline

F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=User support

F23=Set initial menu

E-12 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

APPENDIX E

AS/400 Line Generations

Work with Configuration Status

System: S1010535

Position to .

Starting characters

Type options, press Enter.

1=Vary on 2=Vary off 5=Work with job 8=Work with description

9=Display mode status . . .

Opt Lin/Ctl/Dev/Mod Status

1 L15394 VARIED OFF

L15394

L152910

VARIED OFF

-------------Job------------

Parameters or command Bottom

===>

F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F23=More options

F24=More keys

Sample Configuration

Following is an example of the matching parameters for an

AS/400 5250 configuration with an RC3250 Controller.

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide E-13

APPENDIX E

AS/400 Line Generations

Line description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Resource Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Online at IPL

Data link role

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Physical interface

Connection type

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

> RFLINE

> LIN011

*YES

*PRI

*RS232V24

*MP

Switched network backup

Exchange identifier

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

*NO

*SYSGEN

NRZI data encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Number of attached controllers . . . . . . . . . .

*YES

> 4

Line Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Modem type supported

> 19200

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

*NORMAL

Maximum frame size

Duplex

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

521

*HALF

Nonproductive receive timer

Idle timer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

320

Controller description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Controller type

Controller model

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Link type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

> RFCTL01

> 5394

> 1

> *SDLC

Online at IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Switched connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

*YES

*NO

Switched network backup

Attached nonswitched line

Maximum frame size

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

*NO

> RFLINE

> 517

Exchange identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Station address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

> RFDEV00

Device class

Device type

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

> *RMT

> 5291

Device model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Local location address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

> 1

> 00

Online at IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Attached controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

*YES

> RFCLT01

Drop line at signoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Allow blinking cursor

> *NO

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

*YES

E-14 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

RC3250 Configuration

Option

RS232 or V.35

In this case

RS232

Enabled or Disabled

SDLC Address

. .

. . . . . . .

Enabled

1-4 possible

EXT or 300-38400 . . . .

Any speed

5394 or 5294 . . . . . . . .

5394

261 or 517 . . . . . . . . . .

517

SDLC Address . . . . . . .

1-4 possible

Radio Terminal Configuration

00-63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

00, 16, 32, or 48

INDEX

" " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " " "

SYMBOLS

#F (Transmit and Receive) extended command, 9-2

#G (Receive Only) extended command, 9-17

#H (Set Parameters) extended command, 9-22

#P (Transmit Only) extended command, 9-11

#S (Scan Bar Codes) extended command, 9-29

#T (Tone) extended command,

9-27

#V (Return Version) extended command, 9-27

$ (Escape sequence), 9-44, 9-49

% (Escape sequence), 9-45, 9-49

+ (Escape sequence), 9-46, 9-49

/ (Escape sequence), 9-47, 9-49

NUMBERS

5291 Display Station, 1-7

5294 Control Unit.

See Control units

5394 Control Unit.

See Control units

Access points.

See Base radios

Addresses cursor

Clear Format Table command, 8-15

Clear Unit command, 8-16

Read Immediate command,

8-5

Addresses (Continued) cursor (Continued)

Read Input Fields command, 8-7, 8-9

Read MDT Fields command, 8-10

Restore Screen command,

8-17

Insert Cursor order, 8-25

Move Cursor order, 8-26 parameter errors, 8-44

Repeat to Address order, 8-27

Set Buffer Address order,

8-28

Start of Field order, 8-36

Write to Display command,

8-23

Aid-associated commands, 8-4

AID-generating keys, system code, 8-42

AID-generating keys extended command characters, 9-7

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-15

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-10

RT1100, 3-10

RT1700, 4-13

RT3210, 2-11

RT5900, 5-11

Alarm bit position, 8-24 set by CC Byte 2, 8-22

Signal command format, 8-41

Alpha only field bit number, 8-30 description, 8-34 system code for, 8-42

Alpha shift field bit number, 8-30 description, 8-34

Alphabetic keys

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-10

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-8

RT1100, 3-8

RT1700, 4-10

RT3210, 2-9

RT5900, 5-9

Alt (alternate) key, RT3210, 2-8,

2-19

Alternate character size, 5-18

Alternate cursor

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-21

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-15

RT1100, 3-15

RT1700, 4-19

RT3210, 2-16

RT5900, 5-16

Annunciators

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-4

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-4

RT1100, 3-4

RT1700, 4-4

RT3210, 2-5

RT5900, 5-4

Architecture overview, 1-1 types of network, 1-12

AS/400.

See Host computers

Asynchronous prefixes, 8-40

Attn key encoded sequence, 9-44

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-19, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-14, 7-18

RT1100, 3-14

RT1700, 4-17, 4-22

RT3210, 2-15, 2-19

RT5900, 5-15, 5-19

Auto enter field bit number, 8-30 description, 8-34

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide Index-1

INDEX

Backlight

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-22, 6-24

RT1100, 3-17

RT1700, 4-20, 4-22

RT3210, 2-18, 2-19

Backspace key encoded sequence, 9-44

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-22

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-16

RT1100, 3-17

RT1700, 4-20

RT3210, 2-17

RT5900, 5-17

Bar code length, 9-33, A-6, A-7

Bar code scanning data string formats, A-7 enabling algorithms, A-2

Encoded Code 39, 9-43 extended command, 9-29 host computer, A-6

Base radios on UHF network, 1-12 role on network, 1-11

Batteries, 1-6

Break key, 7-5

Bypass field bit number, 8-30 description, 8-34

Caps Lock key, 7-8, 7-15, 7-18

CC bytes extended command for,

9-30–9-32

Read Input Fields command,

8-7–8-9

Read MDT Fields command,

8-9

Write to Display command,

8-22

CD bit

Read Immediate command,

8-4

Read Input Fields command,

8-7

Read MDT Fields command,

8-9

Read Screen command, 8-11

Center cursor mode

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-2

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-2

RT1100, 3-2

RT1700, 4-2

RT3210, 2-3

RT5900, 5-3

Change of direction bit.

See CD bit

Character sizes, 2-2

Characters

See also Special characters allowed in fields, 8-34–8-35 return AID key, 9-7

Start of Field order, 8-36 write control, 8-22

Write Error Code command,

8-20

Write to Display command,

8-22, 8-23

Clear Format Table command,

8-14

Clear key encoded sequence, 9-45

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-15, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-11, 7-18

RT1100, 3-11

RT1700, 4-13, 4-22

RT3210, 2-12, 2-19

RT5900, 5-12, 5-19

Clear Unit Alternate command,

8-4

Clear Unit command, 8-15

Cluster controllers.

See Control units

Codabar, 9-36

Code 11, 9-37

Code 128, 9-38

Code 39 algorithms, 9-35

Code 93, 9-38

Codes parameter errors, 8-43

Receive Only (#G) extended command, 9-20

Scan Bar Codes (#S) extended command, 9-41

Set Parameters (#H) extended command, 9-25

Index-2 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

Codes (Continued) system, 8-41

Transmit and Receive (#F) extended command, 9-9

Transmit Only (#P) extended command, 9-14

Command function keys.

See

Function keys

Commands asynchronous, 8-40 extended, 9-1 input description, 8-4

Read Immediate, 8-4

Read Immediate Fields, 8-7

Read MDT Alternate, 8-11

Read MDT Fields, 8-9

Read Modified Immediate

Alternate, 8-6

Read Screen, 8-11

Save, 8-12 nonsupported, 8-3, 8-4 output

Clear Format Table, 8-14

Clear Unit, 8-15 description, 8-14

Restore Screen, 8-16

Roll, 8-18

Write Error Code, 8-19

Write to Display, 8-22

Signal, 8-20, 8-40 structure of, 8-3

Computer Identics 2of5, 9-39

Concatenation, 9-50

Control character bytes.

See CC bytes

Control units controller emulation of, 1-7 on UHF network, 1-12 role on network, 1-8

Controllers

See also Control units on UHF network, 1-12 role on network, 1-8

Conversion tables binary to EBCDIC, B-5 decimal to hexadecimal,

B-1–B-3

Corner mode

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-3

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-3

RT1100, 3-3

INDEX

Corner mode (Continued)

RT1700, 4-3

RT3210, 2-3

RT5900, 5-3

Cursor movement keys

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-17, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-12, 7-18

RT1100, 3-12

RT1700, 4-14, 4-22

RT3210, 2-13, 2-19

RT5900, 5-13, 5-19

Customer Response Center, 1-4

Customer Response Hotline, 1-4

Decimal values, B-1–B-3

Del key encoded sequence, 9-44

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-20, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-15, 7-18

RT1100, 3-14

RT1700, 4-18, 4-22

RT3210, 2-19

RT5900, 5-16, 5-19

Digits only field bit number, 8-30 description, 8-34

Display annunciators

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-4

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-4

RT1100, 3-4

RT1700, 4-4

RT3210, 2-5

RT5900, 5-4 asynchronous prefixes, 8-40 data stream commands, 8-1,

8-3 orders, 8-24 parameters errors, 8-43 system codes, 8-41

Display cursor location

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-21

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-15

RT1100, 3-15

RT1700, 4-19

RT3210, 2-16

RT5900, 5-16

Display mode

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-20

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-15

RT1100, 3-14

RT1700, 4-18

RT3210, 2-15

RT5900, 5-16

Documents.

See Publications

Dup key

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-22, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-17, 7-18

RT1100, 3-17

RT1700, 4-20, 4-22

RT3210, 2-18, 2-19

RT5900, 5-18, 5-19 system code, 8-42

Duplication field bit number, 8-30 description, 8-34

EAN Algorithms, 9-34

EBCDIC codes, B-5

Encoded Code 39, 9-35, 9-43

Encoded sequences, 9-43–9-50

End key, 7-5

Enter/Rec Adv key encoded sequence, 9-44

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-15, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-11, 7-18

RT1100, 3-11

RT1700, 4-14, 4-22

RT3210, 2-12, 2-19

RT5900, 5-12, 5-19

Erase Input key encoded sequence, 9-44

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-20, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-15, 7-18

RT1100, 3-15

RT1700, 4-18, 4-22

RT3210, 2-16, 2-19

RT5900, 5-16, 5-19

Error Reset key encoded sequence, 9-45

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-20, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-15, 7-18

RT1100, 3-15

RT1700, 4-18, 4-22

RT3210, 2-16, 2-19

RT5900, 5-16, 5-19

Errors parameter, 8-43

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide Index-3

Receive Only (#G) extended command, 9-20

Scan Bar Codes (#S) extended command, 9-41

Set Parameters (#H) extended command, 9-25 system, 8-41

Transmit and Receive (#F) extended command, 9-9

Transmit Only (#P) extended command, 9-14

Escape characters (Encoded

Code 39), 9-49

Extended Code 39, 9-35

Extended commands enabling, 9-1

Encoded Code 39, 9-43

Receive Only (#G), 9-17

Return Version (#V), 9-27

Scan Bar Codes (#S), 9-29

Set Parameters (#H), 9-22

Tone (#T), 9-27

Transmit and Receive (#F),

9-2

Transmit Only (#P), 9-11

FCW, Start of Header order,

8-39

FCWs

Read MDT Fields command,

8-10

Start of Field order, 8-31

FFW, 8-29

Field Control Word, Start of

Header order, 8-39

Field control words

Read MDT Fields command,

8-10

Start of Field order, 8-31

Field Exit field bit number, 8-30 description, 8-34

Field Exit key encoded sequence, 9-44

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-18, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-13, 7-18

RT1100, 3-13

RT1700, 4-16, 4-22

RT3210, 2-14, 2-20

INDEX

Field Exit key (Continued)

RT5900, 5-14, 5-19 system codes for, 8-42

Field Format Word, 8-29

Field+ key encoded sequence, 9-44

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-22, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-17, 7-18

RT1100, 3-17

RT1700, 4-20, 4-22

RT3210, 2-18, 2-20

RT5900, 5-18, 5-20

Field-- key encoded sequence, 9-44

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-22, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-17, 7-18

RT1100, 3-17

RT1700, 4-20, 4-22

RT3210, 2-18, 2-20

RT5900, 5-18, 5-20 system code for, 8-43

Fields bit numbers, 8-30 parameter errors for, 8-43 resequencing, 8-36, 8-39 system codes for, 8-41 types of, 8-34–8-35

Firmware changing character size,

RT3210, 2-2 changing cursor type

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-21

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-15

RT1100, 3-15

RT1700, 4-19

RT3210, 2-16

RT5900, 5-16 disabling key ahead

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-23

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-17

RT1100, 3-18

RT1700, 4-21

RT3210, 2-18

RT5900, 5-18 opening

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-22

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-16

RT1100, 3-17

RT1700, 4-20

RT3210, 2-17

RT5900, 5-17

Index-4 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

Firmware (Continued) setting display contrast

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-20

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-15

RT1100, 3-14

RT1700, 4-18

RT3210, 2-15

RT5900, 5-16 setting parameters extended command, 9-22

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-1

RT1100, 3-1

RT1700, 4-1

RT3210, 2-1

RT5900, 5-1 setting screen mode

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-2

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-2

RT1100, 3-2

RT1700, 4-2

RT3210, 2-3

RT5900, 5-2

Fn key, 7-5

Forward Tab key encoded sequence, 9-44

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-18, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-13, 7-18

RT1100, 3-17

RT1700, 4-16, 4-22

RT3210, 2-14, 2-19

RT5900, 5-14, 5-19

Func (function) key, RT3210,

2-8, 2-20

Function keys

See also Special function keys encoded sequences, 9-44, 9-47

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-15, 6-16,

6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-11, 7-18

RT1100, 3-11

RT1700, 4-13, 4-22

RT3210, 2-12, 2-19

RT5900, 5-12, 5-19

Getting help, 1-4

Help key encoded sequence, 9-45 from error state

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-19, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-14, 7-19

RT1100, 3-14

RT1700, 4-17, 4-22

RT3210, 2-15, 2-20

RT5900, 5-15, 5-20 non-error state

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-15, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-11, 7-19

RT1100, 3-11

RT1700, 4-14, 4-22

RT3210, 2-12, 2-20

RT5900, 5-12, 5-20

Help, getting, 1-4

Hex key

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-20, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-15, 7-19

RT1100, 3-15

RT1700, 4-18, 4-22

RT3210, 2-16, 2-20

RT5900, 5-16, 5-20

Hex mode

Restore Screen command,

8-17

Write Error Code command,

8-21

Hexadecimal values, B-1–B-3

Home key encoded sequence, 9-44

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-20, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-15, 7-19

RT1100, 3-15

RT1700, 4-18, 4-22

RT3210, 2-16, 2-20

RT5900, 5-16, 5-20

Host computers line generations

AS/400, E-1

System/36, C-1

System/38, D-1 on UHF network, 1-12 role on network, 1-7

I/O field bit number, 8-30 description, 8-34

INDEX

IC (Insert Cursor) order, 8-25

Immediate commands

Clear Unit, 8-15

Read Immediate, 8-4

Read Modified Immediate

Alternate, 8-6

Read Screen, 8-11

Restore Screen, 8-16

Save, 8-12

Input commands description, 8-4

Read Input, 8-4

Read Input Fields, 8-7

Read MDT Alternate, 8-11

Read MDT Fields, 8-9

Read Modified Immediate

Alternate, 8-6

Read Screen, 8-11

Save, 8-12

Input Inhibited annunciator

Clear Format Table command, 8-14

Clear Unit command, 8-16

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-5

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-5

RT1100, 3-5

RT1700, 4-5

RT3210, 2-6

RT5900, 5-5

Start of Field order, 8-35

Write Error Code command,

8-21

Insert Cursor order, 8-25

Insert key encoded sequence, 9-44

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-20, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-15, 7-19

RT1100, 3-15

RT1700, 4-18, 4-22

RT3210, 2-16, 2-20

RT5900, 5-16, 5-20

Insert mode annunciator

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-5

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-5

RT1100, 3-5

RT1700, 4-5

RT3210, 2-6

RT5900, 5-5

Insert mode (Continued)

Clear Format Table command, 8-14

Clear Unit command, 8-16

Restore Screen command,

8-17 system code for, 8-42

Write Error Code command,

8-21

Interleaved 2of5, 9-40

Katakana, 8-30

Key ahead

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-5, 6-23

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-5, 7-17

RT1100, 3-5, 3-18

RT1700, 4-5, 4-21

RT3210, 2-6, 2-18

RT5900, 5-5, 5-18

Key repeat

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-23

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-18

RT1700, 4-21

RT3210, 2-19

RT5900, 5-19

Keyboards

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-5

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-5

RT1100, 3-5

RT1700, 4-6

RT3210, 2-7

RT5900, 5-6

Keys.

See names of specific keys

Lazy mode

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-3

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-3

RT1100, 3-3

RT1700, 4-3

RT3210, 2-4

RT5900, 5-4

Length, bar code, 9-33, A-6, A-7

Light.

See Backlight

Locked mode

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-4

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-4

RT1100, 3-4

RT1700, 4-4

RT3210, 2-4

RT5900, 5-4

Lustat, 8-17

Magnetic Stripe Reader, 8-31,

8-32, 8-36

Mandatory entry field bit numbers, 8-30 description, 8-34 system codes for, 8-42–8-43

Mandatory fill field bit number, 8-30 description, 8-34 system code for, 8-42

Manuals.

See Publications

MC (Move Cursor) order, 8-26

MDT bit

Clear Format Table command, 8-15

Clear Unit command, 8-16

Read Immediate command,

8-5

Read Input Fields command,

8-7

Read MDT Alternate command, 8-11

Read MDT Fields command,

8-9–8-10

Restore Screen command,

8-17

Start of Field order, 8-30

Write to Display command,

8-22–8-23

Menu key

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-22, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-16, 7-19

RT1100, 3-17

RT1700, 4-20, 4-22

RT3210, 2-17, 2-20

RT5900, 5-17, 5-20

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide Index-5

INDEX

Message Waiting annunciator

Clear Format Table command, 8-15

Clear Unit command, 8-16

Restore Screen command,

8-17

RT1100, 3-5

RT1700, 4-5

RT3210, 2-6

RT5900, 5-5

Signal command format, 8-41

Write to Display command,

8-22–8-24

Messages parameter errors, 8-43

Receive Only (#G) extended command, 9-20

Scan Bar Codes (#S) extended command, 9-41

Set Parameters (#H) extended command, 9-25

Transmit and Receive (#F) extended command, 9-9

Transmit Only (#P) extended command, 9-14

Messages, system, 8-41

Mod 10 parameter code for, 8-44

Start of Field order, 8-35 system code for, 8-42

Mod 11 parameter code for, 8-44

Start of Field order, 8-35 system code for, 8-42

Modified data tag bit.

See MDT bit

Modified field bit number, 8-30 description, 8-34

Move Cursor order, 8-26

MSR, 8-31, 8-32, 8-36

Negative response, 8-22

New Line key encoded sequence, 9-44

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-22, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-17, 7-18

RT1100, 3-17

New Line key (Continued)

RT1700, 4-20, 4-22

RT3210, 2-18, 2-19

RT5900, 5-18, 5-19

Non-repeating keys

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-23

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-18

RT1700, 4-21

RT3210, 2-19

RT5900, 5-19

Nonbypass field, 8-30

Numeric keys

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-12

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-8

RT1100, 3-8

RT1700, 4-11

RT3210, 2-9

RT5900, 5-9

Numeric only field bit number, 8-30 description, 8-34 system code for, 8-42

Numeric shift field bit number, 8-30 description, 8-35

NumLk key, 7-7, 7-19

Orders description, 8-24

Insert Cursor, 8-25

Move Cursor, 8-26

Repeat to Address, 8-27

Set Buffer Address, 8-28

Start of Field, 8-28

Start of Header, 8-38

Transparent Data, 8-40

Output commands

Clear Format Table, 8-14

Clear Unit, 8-15 description, 8-14

Restore Screen, 8-16

Roll, 8-18

Write Error Code, 8-19

Write to Display, 8-22

Index-6 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

Overlays

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-9

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-7

RT1100, 3-7

RT1700, 4-9

RT3210, 2-8

RT5900, 5-8

Page mode

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-3

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-3

RT1100, 3-3

RT1700, 4-3

RT3210, 2-4

RT5900, 5-3

Parameter errors, 8-43

Pause key, 7-5

PEN*KEY 6400 Computer

AID-generating keys, 6-15 alphabetic keys, 6-10 annunciators, 6-4 backlight, 6-22 cursor keys, 6-17

Field Exit key, 6-18 keyboards, 6-5 menu, 6-22 numeric keys, 6-12 other keys, 6-22 overlays, 6-9 screen modes, 6-2 screen size, 6-2 shift keys, 6-9 signal keys, 6-19 special characters, 6-12 special control keys, 6-19 special host keys, 6-21 system messages, 6-25 user’s guide, 1-5

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer

AID-generating keys, 7-10 alphabetic keys, 7-8 annunciators, 7-4 cursor keys, 7-12 keyboard, 7-5 menu, 7-16 numeric keys, 7-8 other keys, 7-16 overlay, 7-7 screen modes, 7-2 screen size, 7-2

INDEX

PEN*KEY 6500 Computer

(Continued) shift keys, 7-7 signal keys, 7-14 special characters, 7-8 special control keys, 7-14 special host keys, 7-16 system messages, 7-19 user’s guide, 1-5

Phone numbers, 1-4

Plessey, 9-36

Posthelp error state

Read Screen command, 8-11

Roll command, 8-18

Write Error Code command,

8-21

Write to Display command,

8-22

Prefixes, asynchronous, 8-40

Prehelp error state

Read Screen command, 8-11

Roll command, 8-18

Write Error Code command,

8-19–8-20

Write to Display command,

8-22

Print key

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-15, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-11, 7-19

RT1100, 3-11

RT1700, 4-14, 4-22

RT3210, 2-12, 2-20

RT5900, 5-12, 5-20

Problem reporting, 1-4

Publications, 1-4–1-6

RA order, 8-27

Radio data network components, 1-7 description, 1-7 types of, 1-12

Radio terminals on UHF network, 1-12 role on network, 1-11

Read Immediate command, 8-4

Read Input Fields command, 8-7

Read MDT Alternate command,

8-11

Read MDT Fields command, 8-9

Read Modified Immediate Alternate command, 8-6

Read Screen command, 8-11

Receive Only (#G) extended command, 9-17

Record Backspace key

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-16

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-11

RT1100, 3-11

RT1700, 4-14

RT3210, 2-12

RT5900, 5-12

Repeat to Address order, 8-27

Repeating keys

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-23

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-18

RT1700, 4-21

RT3210, 2-19

RT5900, 5-19

Reporting problems, 1-4

Request/Response Header, 8-7

Resequencing

Read Immediate command,

8-5

Read Input Field command,

8-8

Start of Field command, 8-36

Start of Field order, 8-31

Start of Header order, 8-39

Restore Screen command, 8-16

Return key, 7-17, 7-18

Return Version (#V) extended command, 9-27

Reverse image

Clear Format Table command, 8-15

Clear Unit command, 8-16,

8-39

Start of Field order, 8-36

Reverse Tab key encoded sequence, 9-44

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-18, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-13, 7-18

RT1100, 3-17

RT1700, 4-16, 4-22

RT3210, 2-14, 2-19

RT5900, 5-14, 5-19

RH, 8-7

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide Index-7

Right-adjust field bit number, 8-30 description, 8-35

Roll command, 8-18

Roll keys encoded sequence, 9-44

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-16, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-11, 7-19

RT1100, 3-11

RT1700, 4-14, 4-22

RT3210, 2-12, 2-20

RT5900, 5-12, 5-20

RT1100 Radio Terminal

AID-generating keys, 3-10 alphabetic keys, 3-8 annunciators, 3-4 backlight, 3-17 cursor keys, 3-12

Field Exit key, 3-13 keyboard, 3-5 menu, 3-17 numeric keys, 3-8 other keys, 3-16 overlay, 3-7 parameter errors, 8-43 screen modes, 3-2 screen size, 3-2 shift keys, 3-7 signal keys, 3-13 special characters, 3-8 special control keys, 3-14 special host keys, 3-16 system messages, 3-18, 8-41 user’s guide, 1-5

RT1700 Radio Terminal

AID-generating keys, 4-13 alphabetic keys, 4-10 annunciators, 4-4 backlight, 4-20 cursor keys, 4-14

Field Exit key, 4-16 keyboards, 4-6 menu, 4-20 numeric keys, 4-11 other keys, 4-20 overlays, 4-9 parameter errors, 8-43 screen modes, 4-2 screen size, 4-2 shift keys, 4-9 signal keys, 4-17 special characters, 4-11

INDEX

RT1700 Radio Terminal

(Continued) special control keys, 4-17 special host keys, 4-19 system messages, 4-23, 8-41 user’s guide, 1-5

RT3210 Radio Terminal

AID-generating keys, 2-11 alphabetic keys, 2-9 annunciators, 2-5 backlight, 2-18 character sizes, 2-2 cursor keys, 2-13

Field Exit key, 2-14 keyboard, 2-7 menu, 2-17 numeric keys, 2-9 other keys, 2-17–2-19 overlay, 2-8 parameter errors, 8-43 screen modes, 2-3 screen size, 2-2 shift keys, 2-8 signal keys, 2-14 special characters, 2-9 special control keys, 2-15 special host keys, 2-17 system messages, 2-20, 8-41 user’s guide, 1-5

RT5900 Radio Terminal

AID-generating keys, 5-11 alphabetic keys, 5-9 annunciators, 5-4 cursor keys, 5-13 keyboard, 5-6 menu, 5-17 numeric keys, 5-9 other keys, 5-17 overlay, 5-8 parameter errors, 8-43 screen modes, 5-2 screen size, 5-2 shift keys, 5-8 signal keys, 5-15 special characters, 5-9 special control keys, 5-15 special host keys, 5-17 system messages, 5-20, 8-41 user’s guide, 1-5

Save command, 8-12

SBA order, 8-28

Scan ahead

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-23

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-17

RT1100, 3-18

RT1700, 4-21

RT3210, 2-19

RT5900, 5-19

Scan Bar Codes (#S) extended command, 9-29

Screen Design Aid, 8-2

Screen modes

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-2

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-2

RT1100, 3-2

RT1700, 4-2

RT3210, 2-3

RT5900, 5-2

Screen sizes

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-2

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-2

RT1100, 3-2

RT1700, 4-2

RT3210, 2-2

RT5900, 5-2

ScrLk key, 7-5

SDA, 8-2

Selector light pen, 8-31, 8-32

Self-check field, 8-31, 8-33, 8-35

Session control request

Read Input Fields command,

8-7

Read MDT Fields command,

8-9

Set Buffer Address order, 8-28

Set Parameters (#H) extended command, 9-22

Setup key, 7-5

SF order, 8-28

Sft (shift) key, RT3210, 2-8, 2-20

Shift key

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-9, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-7, 7-19

RT1100, 3-7

RT1700, 4-9, 4-22

RT5900, 5-8, 5-20

Shift Lock key

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-20, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-15, 7-18

RT1100, 3-15

RT1700, 4-18, 4-22

RT3210, 2-16, 2-20

RT5900, 5-16, 5-20

Shift lock key, 7-8

Signal command, 8-20, 8-40

Signal keys

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-19

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-14

RT1100, 3-13

RT1700, 4-17

RT3210, 2-14

RT5900, 5-15

Signed numeric field bit number, 8-30 description, 8-35 system code for, 8-42–8-43

SLP, 8-31, 8-32

SOH order, 8-38

Special characters encoded sequences, 9-45, 9-47 overstruck asterisk, 8-34

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-9, 6-12

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-8

RT1100, 3-7, 3-8

RT1700, 4-9, 4-11

RT3210, 2-8, 2-9

RT5900, 5-8, 5-9

Special control keys

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-19

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-14

RT1100, 3-14

RT1700, 4-17

RT3210, 2-15

RT5900, 5-15

Index-8 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

INDEX

Special function keys

AID-generating

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-15

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-10

RT1100, 3-10

RT1700, 4-13

RT3210, 2-11

RT5900, 5-11 cursor movement

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-17

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-12

RT1100, 3-12

RT1700, 4-14

RT3210, 2-13

RT5900, 5-13 signal

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-19

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-14

RT1100, 3-13

RT1700, 4-17

RT3210, 2-14

RT5900, 5-15 special control

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-19

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-14

RT1100, 3-14

RT1700, 4-17

RT3210, 2-15

RT5900, 5-15 special host

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-21

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-16

RT1100, 3-16

RT1700, 4-19

RT3210, 2-17

RT5900, 5-17

Special host keys

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-21

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-16

RT1100, 3-16

RT1700, 4-19

RT3210, 2-17

RT5900, 5-17

Spread Spectrum Transmission.

See SST

SS message state asynchronous prefixes, 8-40

Clear Format Table command, 8-14

Clear Unit command, 8-15

Read Immediate command,

8-5

SS message state (Continued)

Read Screen command, 8-11

Restore Screen command,

8-16

Roll command, 8-18

Save Immediate command,

8-13

Write Error Code command,

8-19

Write to Display command,

8-22

SST base radios, 1-11 radio terminals, 1-12

Start of Field order, 8-28

Start of Header order, 8-38

Straight 2of5, 9-39

Sys Req key

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-21, 6-24

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-16, 7-19

RT1100, 3-16

RT1700, 4-19, 4-22

RT3210, 2-17, 2-20

RT5900, 5-17, 5-20

System codes, 8-41

System messages, 8-41

System request state

Clear Format Table command, 8-14

Clear Unit command, 8-16

Read Immediate command,

8-5

Read Screen command, 8-11

Restore Screen command,

8-16

Roll command, 8-18

Save command, 8-13 system messages, 8-41

Write Error Code command,

8-19

Write to Display command,

8-22

System/36.

See Host computers

System/38.

See Host computers

Tables bar code string formats, A-7

CC byte 1, 8-23, 9-30

Tables (Continued)

CC byte 2, 8-24, 9-31

CC byte 3, 9-32 escape sequences, 9-44

Field Format Word portion,

8-30, 8-31 function key bit switches,

8-39 input command, 8-3 orders, 8-25 output command, 8-4

PEN*KEY 6400 aid-generating keys, 6-16

AID-generating keys, 6-15 key repeat, 6-24 other keys, 6-22 signal keys, 6-19 special characters, 6-12,

6-14 special control keys, 6-20 special host keys, 6-21 standard keys, 6-10, 6-11

PEN*KEY 6500

AID-generating keys, 7-11 key repeat, 7-18 other keys, 7-16 signal keys, 7-14 special characters, 7-8 special control keys, 7-15 special host keys, 7-16 resequencing, 8-39

RT1100

AID-generating keys, 3-11 other keys, 3-17 signal keys, 3-14 special characters, 3-8 special control keys, 3-14 special host keys, 3-16

RT1700

AID-generating keys, 4-13 key repeat, 4-22 letters, 4-10 other keys, 4-20 signal keys, 4-17 special characters, 4-11 special control keys, 4-18 special host keys, 4-19

RT3210

AID-generating keys, 2-12 key repeat, 2-19 other keys, 2-17 signal keys, 2-15 special characters, 2-9

5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide Index-9

INDEX

Tables (Continued)

RT3210 (Continued) special control keys, 2-15 special host keys, 2-17

RT5900

AID-generating keys, 5-12 key repeat, 5-19 other keys, 5-17 signal keys, 5-15 special characters, 5-9 special control keys, 5-16 special host keys, 5-17

Start of Field attributes, 8-36

Start of Field control word,

8-36

TD order, 8-40

Terminating keys, 9-43

Test Request key

PEN*KEY 6400, 6-21

PEN*KEY 6500, 7-16

RT1100, 3-16

RT1700, 4-19

RT3210, 2-17

RT5900, 5-17

Tone (#T) extended command,

9-27

Transmit and Receive (#F) extended command, 9-2

Transmit Only (#P) extended command, 9-11

Transparency, 8-31, 8-32

Transparent Data order, 8-40

UHF base radios, 1-11 radio data network, 1-12 radio terminals, 1-12

Ultra High Frequency.

See UHF

Unbind request

Read Input Fields command,

8-7

Read MDT Fields command,

8-9

UPC, 9-33

Write Error Code command,

8-19

Write Structured Field command, 8-3

Write to Display command, 8-22

WTD command, 8-22

XOFF, 9-7

XON, 9-7

Index-10 5250 Terminal Emulation Programmer’s Reference Guide

Salut! Sunt un chatbot AI special antrenat pentru a te ajuta cu Intermec 5250 Programmer's Reference Manual. Am analizat cu atenție documentul și te pot ajuta să găsești informațiile exacte de care ai nevoie sau să explic conținutul în termeni clari și simpli. Indiferent dacă ești în căutarea unui ghidaj privind anumite funcții, pași de depanare sau utilizare generală, nu ezita să pui întrebări. Cu cât oferi mai multe detalii despre preocupările sau nevoile tale, cu atât mai precis și eficient te pot ajuta!

Asistentul scrie

Asistentul nu mai este la tastatură. Te rugăm să încerci din nou mai târziu.

Se pare că ai ajuns la un document care este scris în mai multe limbi, inclusiv una care nu este limba ta nativă. Poți folosi linkurile următoare pentru a ascunde temporar paginile fără limba pe care o preferi.

Publicitate